THE LIBRARY 
 
 OF 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY 
 OF CALIFORNIA 
 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
B. 0. BAKER 
 LAWYER 
 
PITMANIC SHORTHAND 
 
 A COMPLETE TEXT-BOOK 
 ON THE AMERICAN-PITMAN SYSTEM. 
 
 BY 
 
 SELBY A. MORAN, 
 
 Instructor in Shorthand, Ann Arbor High School. Principal of the 
 Stenographic Institute, Ann Arbor. Author of "One Hun- 
 dred Valuable Suggestions to Shorthand Students." 
 
 ANN ARBOR, MICH. 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 
 
 1904. 
 
COPYRIGHTED 1904 
 
 BY 
 SELBY A. MORAN. 
 
 i 
 
 THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, ANN ARBOR. 
 
PREFACE 
 
 On account of the great number of real and imitation systems 
 of Shorthand there certainly is no need for another. There are 
 already too many systems which are nothing more than some stand- 
 ard method of writing Shorthand slightly modified so as to give the 
 promtilgator an opportunity to pose as the author of a "new" sys- 
 tem. Very seldom are these so-called new systems any improve- 
 ment over the ones from which thev are derived. There will, 
 
 2 
 
 5y doubtless, continue to be those who think they have discovered 
 
 
 
 ^ wherein they can modify some minor details in the system of Short- 
 
 hand which they have learned. Having done this, they will claim 
 3 to have devised "a new and greatly improved system of stenography." 
 
 The writer has no sympathy for such people. 
 
 5 While there is no need for a new system of Shorthand there 
 
 tt is, however, a great need of improvement in the preparation of 
 
 ^ Shorthand text-books and in the methods of teaching the subject. 
 
 During the past few decades there has been a wonderful advance in 
 
 the methods of giving instruction in most branches of education. 
 
 ; Writers of Shorthand text-books especially seem to have felt but 
 
 H slightly the effect of this development and have in the presentation 
 
 of the subject often failed to embody the best educational methods. 
 
 It is because of the firm conviction that the writer of this little 
 
 work is able to offer some new and, as he believes, better ideas 
 
 as to the methods of teaching the American- Pitman System of 
 
 iii 
 
 449532 
 
iv PREFACE 
 
 Shorthand that he feels justified in offering this work to the public. 
 If it shall have made the work of acquiring a knowledge of Short- 
 hand more systematic as well as more easy and pleasant, the end 
 sought will have been gained. His. many years' experience as a 
 teacher of Shorthand and a careful study of the best methods of 
 imparting instruction in this art inspire a confidence that the publi- 
 cation of this little volume will not have been in vain. 
 
 ANN ARBOR, MICHIGAN, THE AUTHOR. 
 
 September i, 1904. 
 
 Note. The student should not attempt to make too rapid 
 advancement. A lesson is not mastered until the student thor- 
 oughly understands the principles explained in the lesson and is 
 able to apply them readily and correctly in writing the exercise? 
 in the lesson. He should also be able to write the wordsigns 
 and phrasesigns without the least hesitation and translate the 
 shorthand at the end of each lesson as readily as he could read 
 the same matter in ordinary print. To do this requires much 
 practice. The more practice given to reading shorthand the 
 better. 
 
 Following the last lesson in the text is an alphabetically ar- 
 ranged list of the wordsigns and phrasesigns in ordinary print. 
 Following every third word or phrase is a blank line. It is de- 
 signed that the student, just as soon as he has committed each 
 list of these signs in the sixth and following lessons shall then 
 fill in the blanks for the words which are given in each lesson. 
 When the lessons are all completed, the student will have a com- 
 plete alphabetically arranged list of all the abbreviations. The 
 actual work of making this list will aid the student materially in 
 fixing these signs in mind. The teacher should examine the 
 student's text from time to time in order to ascertain whether 
 or not he is keeping his list made up as he goes along. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 A successful text-book on the subject of Shorthand must em- 
 body certain recognized principles of the art of teaching, modified, of 
 course, to conform to the peculiarities of this particular subject. It 
 has been the author's aim to apply these principles as far as possibkx 
 in this work. The general arrangement ^f the text is as follows : 
 
 First. A very few of the principles constituting the system are 
 introduced at a time, beginning with the most elementary. 
 
 Second. For convenience in class work these principles are 
 divided into lessons, each lesson consisting in the introduction of a 
 very few new principles. 
 
 Third. With the introduction of the principles in each lesson 
 is given a most explicit and thorough explanation of their use. 
 
 Fourth. Immediately following the explanation of the princi- 
 ples are a few carefully selected words illustrating the use of these 
 principles. These words are given in both Longhand and Shorthand. 
 
 Fifth. Following these illustrations in each lesson is a list of 
 words to be written making use of the principles explained in the 
 lesson. After the student has learned to form the outlines correctly, 
 he should write these words over and over again until he is able 
 to write them readily. 
 
 Sixth. After the principle of outline abbreviation has been ex- 
 plained, there are introduced in each lesson a few abbreviations, or 
 wordsigns, as they are called in Shorthand, formed by abbreviating 
 the consonant outlines of commonly occurring words. These word- 
 signs should be thoroughly committed to memory and written a 
 sufficient number of times to enable the student to recognize the 
 word the instant he sees its sign and to recall the sign immediately 
 upon hearing the word. 
 
 Seventh. After the principle of phrasing has been explained, 
 there are given in each lesson, for the student's practice, a tew 
 commonly occurring phrases, the words of which embrace the use . 
 of the principles and wordsigns in that and preceding lessons. 
 
 Eighth. Except in the first few lessons, there are introduced 
 in each lesson a few brief sentences for practice. As soon as 
 a sufficient number of the principles have been given, these sen- 
 
 v 
 
vi INTRODUCTION 
 
 tences take the form of letters since the student has especial need 
 of practice upon this form of composition. The sentences and 
 letters in each lesson are composed of words so selected that they 
 embody, as far as possible, a review of the principles in all the 
 preceding lessons. At the same time no word is ever introduced 
 until the principles, by which it is written in its briefest form, have 
 been explained. The stuttent, therefore, never has occasion to write 
 a word in but one way and that with the briefest possible outline. 
 The carrying out of this idea necessarily restricts the author in the 
 construction of sentences for the student's practice, making it im- 
 possible in a few instances in the early lessons, to give for practice 
 sentences with the best possible wording. In order to give the stu- 
 dent further practice in the proper phrasing of outlines, the words 
 in each exercise which in reporting should be phrased, are joined 
 by hyphens in the text. These sentences, like the list words, word- 
 signs and phrases, should be written many times by the student 
 who should not feel that he has his lesson sufficiently prepared for 
 recitation until he is able to write the list words, phrases and sen- 
 tences within the time specified. 
 
 Ninth. For the purpose of drill in reading Shorthand other 
 than one's own writing, there is given at the end of each lesson 
 after the sixth an exercise in Shorthand to translate. 
 
 Tenth. To secure thoroughness, every fifth lesson consists of 
 a carefully prepared review of the preceding four lessons. 
 
 Eleventh. The student should impress upon his mind the 
 necessity of thoroughly mastering the, lesson in hand before taking 
 up a new one. 
 
 Twelfth. When the lessons have been gone over once they 
 should be thoroughly reviewed, giving especial attention to the 
 wordsigns and to practice on the exercises to gain speed. In this 
 review work, the time given for writing the exercises should be 
 reduced at least one-third. Following this the student should take 
 up miscellaneous matter for speed practice. 
 
 This method of presenting the subject of Shorthand t the 
 student is, in the judgment of the author, the proper one. Years 
 of actual experience in teaching Shorthand have demonstrated to 
 him its entire practicability and success. 
 
LESSON I. 
 
 THE ALPHABET, SEC. I. 
 
 1. The first work of the student in taking up the subject 
 of Shorthand is to thoroughly familiarize himself with the 
 consonant alphabet which forms the ground-work of a 
 Shorthand education. The alphabet is divided into two 
 sections : 1st, the straight letters: 2nd, the curved letters. 
 
 2. This lesson treats of the straight letters. They are 
 as follows : 
 
 \ \ M / / ^ / 
 
 Pe Be Te De Chay Jay Kay Gay Hay Ray 
 
 3. The names beneath the Shorthand letters are used 
 merely for convenience in referring to them. 
 
 4. Pe represents the ordinary sound of p, as in pat, 
 pour, par. 
 
 5. Be is the same as pe except that be is shaded. Be 
 is used for the ordinary sound of b, as in bat, bowl, rob. 
 
 6. Te is used for the usual sound of t as in tap, tame, 
 tip. 
 
 7. De is the same as te except that it is shaded. De 
 represents the common sound of d, as in date, done, lad. 
 
 8. Chay represents the sound of ch, as in check, cheap, 
 ditch. 
 
 9. Jay is the same as chay except that it is shaded. Jay 
 represents the usual sound of j and also the soft sound of 
 
 I 
 
2 PITMANIC 
 
 g which has the same sound as j, as in jam, gem, joke, 
 rage, page. 
 
 10. Kay represents the ordinary sound of k and the 
 hard sound of c, as in kite, cake, coal, lake. 
 
 11. Gay is the same as kay except that it is shaded. Gay 
 represents the hard sound of g, as in go, game, log, goal. 
 
 12. Hay, which is not shaded, represents the aspirate 
 sound of h, as in hotel, hitch, hub, behead. In such 
 words as behead, and wherever hay is the second or fol- 
 lowing stroke in an outline, the hook on hay is formed by 
 retracing the preceding stroke the length of the hook, as 
 shown in the illustration following in this lesson. 
 
 13. Ray, which is not shaded, represents the sound of 
 r, as in rug, rake, park, gory. 
 
 14. Pe, be, te, de, chay and jay are always written 
 downward; hay and ray, upward. They are called up- 
 right letters. Kay and gay are always w r ritten from left 
 to right. They are called horizontal letters. 
 
 15. Pe, be, chay and jay slant as shown in the illus- 
 trations. 
 
 16. Te and de should be as nearly perpendicular as 
 possible. 
 
 17. Beginners are apt to slant te and de slightly, either 
 to the left or right. This causes trouble later when an 
 attempt is made to read words containing te or de slightly 
 slanted when they should be perpendicular. Ray should 
 be given a slightly greater slant than chay. This one nat- 
 urally does in writing this letter with an upward stroke. 
 
 18. In writing a word in Shorthand the strokes repre- 
 senting the consonants in the word form what is called the 
 consonant outline of the word and is all that is usually 
 written. Thus, in the word betake, the outline would be 
 be-te-kay ; in the word uproot, the outline would be pe-ray- 
 
SHORTHAND 3 
 
 te. The vowels, which are explained in a subsequent les- 
 son, are seldom written with the outline. 
 
 19. In writing an outline for a word it should be begun 
 so that the first upright letter, whether written upward or 
 downward, will rest on the line upon which one is writing. 
 Thus in writing dope, written de-pe, the de should rest on 
 the line. This would of necessity require^ the pe to be 
 written below the line, since, in joining together the differ- 
 ent consonant letters of a word, each letter after the first, 
 begins where the preceding letter ends. For example, in 
 writing the word deputy, written de-pe-te, the de rests 
 on the line. The pe is joined at the bottom of de and goes 
 below the line. Te, the last letter in the word, is written 
 from the end of pe, thus causing it to end the length of two 
 letters below the line. 
 
 20. When an outline begins with either kay or gay, or 
 any of the curved horizontal letters, the first letter should 
 be written the length of a te above the line, if the first 
 upright letter is written downwards, as in giddy, written 
 gay-de. The outline should begin on the line, if the first 
 upright letter is written upward, as in gory, written gay- 
 ray. That is, an outline should be begun so that the first 
 upright letter in the outline, whether written upward or 
 downward, will rest on the line. 
 
 21. Words consisting wholly of horizontal letters, such 
 as keg, written kay-gay, should be written immediately 
 above the line upon which the writing is being done, as the 
 outline for keg, shown below. 
 
 22. The following illustrations will show how the dif- 
 ferent letters in an outline are joined and where an outline 
 should be begun in reference to the line upon which one is 
 writing : 
 
PITMANIC 
 
 
 hedge betake deputy depot giddy gory keg behead 
 
 23. Care should be exercised in the very beginning to 
 make a clear distinction between light and shaded letters. 
 Trouble always results, especially for the beginner, when 
 he attempts to read matter not properly shaded. 
 
 24. It is important thajt all consonant strokes be as 
 nearly uniform in length as possible. About one-sixth of 
 an inch is the average length which the most rapid reporters 
 make their letters. Unless one acquires the habit of writing 
 all the strokes of a uniform, length he will have trouble 
 later when he comes to the use of half-length and double- 
 length letters. It is of far less importance whether one 
 writes a large or a small hand. The important thing is 
 to write all of the letters as nearly the same length as pos- 
 sible. 
 
 25. In writing Shorthand the best results may be ob- 
 tained by holding the pen or pencil much more nearly up- 
 right than it is usually held when writing Longhand. In 
 this position one is less apt to shade letters unintentionally. 
 
 26. The fact that several words may have the same con- 
 sonant outline usually puzzles the beginner. Thus, leaving, 
 levying, living and loving are all written with similar out- 
 lines. It rarely happens that where one would make sense 
 any of the others could be used. When the student reaches 
 the point where he is able to write complete sentences, as 
 will be possible after he has taken a few lessons, he will 
 find that with the help of the context all danger of am- 
 biguity in this respect will disappear without his finding 
 it necesary to take time to insert the vowels. 
 
 27. Immediately preceding the exercise in each lesson 
 
SHORTHAND 5 
 
 two numbers are given in parentheses. The first gives the 
 number of words in the exercise and the second the number 
 of minutes and seconds in which the exercise should be 
 written by the student as it is read to him. The student 
 should practice on each exercise until he is able to write it 
 within the time specified. The rule adopted in numbering 
 the words is the same as that used by telegraph operators 
 in reckoning the number of words in messages. 
 
 28. Immediately following the explanation of the prin- 
 ciples given in each lesson there is given a number of words 
 called list words. The student should write the consonant 
 outlines for these words many times. 
 
 EXERCISE i. 
 
 29. List Words. (36 1 130. ) 
 
 i Duck, 2 peck, 3 cake, 4 check, 5 rake, 6 poet, 7 rogue, 
 8 ditto, 9 page, 10 rage, n body, 12 deputy, 13 go, 14 bake, 
 15 gage, 16 bedeck, 17 touch, 18 copy, 19 budge, 20 judge, 
 21 pity, 22 age, 23 tuck, 24 wretch, 25 poke, 26 edit, 27 keg, 
 28 tub, 29 roach, 30 carriage, 31 carry, 32 wrote, 33 hedge, 
 34 rug, 35 wreck, 36 peg. 
 
 30. After the student has carefully committed to mem- 
 ory the straight letters and is able to write each of the above 
 words correctly, he should write the entire list over from 
 fifty to a hundred times, or until he can write the thirty-six 
 words in a minute and a half as they are read to him, and 
 he should read over and over again the Shorthand he has 
 written until he is able to read the list of words in the same 
 length of time. 
 
 31. It will be noticed that the Shorthand illustrations 
 and exercises throughout the text are not formed with 
 mathematical exactness. They are, rather, photographic re- 
 productions of actual Shorthand writing. This is done de- 
 
6 PITMANIC 
 
 signedly because the large majority of students find it im- 
 possible to make their Shorthand characters approach any- 
 where near the mathematically exact Shorthand engravings 
 found in most text-books on the subject. As a result many 
 beginners become discouraged at their utter inability to 
 closely imitate the illustrations and give up the study. By 
 giving illustrations which are photographic reproductions 
 of actual Shorthand work the student finds it possible to 
 make his characters approach more nearly those formed in 
 actual reporting and is thereby encouraged to go ahead and 
 master the art. 
 
 LESSON II. 
 THE ALPHABET, SEC. n. 
 
 i. In addition to the ten straight letters given in the 
 preceding lesson, there are fifteen curved strokes represent- 
 ing the remaining elementary consonant sounds. They are : 
 
 (( )) JJ 
 
 Ef Ve Ith The Es Ze Ish Zhe Lay Yea Ar Way Em En Ing 
 
 2. As explained in the previous lesson, the names be- 
 neath the letters are given merely for convenience in refer- 
 ring to them. 
 
 3. Ef represents the usual sound of f, as in fan, fate, 
 puff, cuff, and also the sound of f when represented by 
 certain other letters, as gh in laugh, cough, rough, and ph, 
 as in phantom, phase, physic. 
 
 4. Ve represents the usual sound of v, as in vain, vacate, 
 shave, vile. It is exactly like ef except that it is shaded. 
 
 5. Ith represents the sound of th, as in thin, thigh, lath, 
 wrath. 
 
SHORTHAND 7 
 
 6. The represents the sound of th, as in them, that, 
 bathe, though, breathe. It is exactly like ith except that 
 it is shaded. 
 
 7. Es represents trie usual sound of s, and also the soft 
 sound of c, as in assume, also, Lucy, policy. 
 
 8. Ze represents the sound of z and also s when it has 
 the sound of z, as in buzz, phase, raise, zone, Arizona. 
 It is the same as es except that it is shaded. 
 
 9. Ish represents the usual sound of sh, as in ship, lash, 
 dash, shame, cash, shop. 
 
 10. Zhe represents the sound of s or z in such words as 
 measure, pleasure, treasure, seizure. It is the same as 
 ish except that it is shaded. 
 
 11. Lay represents the usual sound of 1, as in lame, 
 lake, lady, fellow, pillow, daily. 
 
 12. Yea represents the consonant sound of y, as in 
 yellow, yes, yankee, your. It has the same slant and curve 
 as lay, but yea is shaded while lay is light. 
 
 13. Ar (as well as ray) represents the usual sound of 
 r, ar being used in certain connections and ray in others. 
 The different uses will be explained in a subsequent lesson. 
 Ar is used in such words as ark, arm, fair, pair, dare. 
 
 14. Way represents the consonant sound of w, as in 
 wake, wade, wage, wag. It is exactly like ar except that 
 it is shaded. 
 
 15. Em represents the usual sound of m, as in many, 
 fame, dame, mug, gum, game, mail. 
 
 1 6. En represents the usual sound of n, as in name, 
 unite, nick, knave. 
 
 17. Ing represents the sound of ng, as in going, doing, 
 saving, and of n when that letter immediately precedes k, 
 and in some instances g, as in tank, bank, rank, ankle, 
 angle, tangle, wrangle. It is exactly like en except that it 
 
8 PITMANIC 
 
 is shaded. 
 
 1 8. Ef, ve, ith, the, es, ze, ish, zhe, way, yea, and ar 
 are always written with a downward stroke. Em, en, 
 and ing, from left to right. Lay is made upwards. 
 
 19. A period in Shorthand is usually written by a small 
 cross. There are two other methods of indicating a full 
 pause. These will be explained later. 
 
 20. We desire to repeat in this lesson that the student 
 should be careful to make sufficient distinction between 
 the light and shaded letters in order to avoid trouble in 
 distinguishing the one from the other when transcribing his 
 notes. Care should be taken also to give the slanting letters 
 sufficient slant and to write the perpendicular letters, ith, 
 the, es and ze, so that they will be as nearly vertical as 
 possible. 
 
 21. The tendency among students is not to make enough 
 distinction between . slanting and vertical letters, and 
 trouble results when an attempt is made to read what has 
 been written. 
 
 22. We deem it advisable to repeat in this lesson the 
 statement that in writing an outline it should be begun so 
 that the first upright letter, whether written upward or 
 downward, will rest on the line. Thus, lake, written lay- 
 kay, should begin on the line, since lay, the first upright 
 letter, is struck upwards and should rest on the line. Like- 
 wise, coffee, written kay-ef, should begin above the line, 
 so that ef, the first upright letter and which is struck down- 
 wards, will rest on the line. The use of curved and straight 
 letters is shown in the following words : 
 
 ledge 
 
SHORTHAND 
 
 rush lazy wake going yoUe Jennie luck coffee 
 
 23. When a proper name is written in Shorthand it 
 should have two small ticks written beneath it to indicate 
 that fact, as in Jennie. When a proper name is fully vocal- 
 ized this underscore, as it is called, is unnecessary. Proper 
 names, for which there are wordsigns, never require the 
 underscore or vowels. 
 
 EXERCISE 2. 
 
 24. List Words. (37 1 130.) 
 
 Using ar or ray, as indicated, for r write the following: 
 i Fame, 2 many, 3 lame, 4 may, 5 shape, 6 death, 7 pay, 
 8 easy, 9 bunk, 10 lathe, n yoke, 12 wake, 13 argue (ar), 
 14 into, 15 escape, 16 poking, 17 neck, 18 gum, 19 tame, 
 20 tidy, 21 daily, 22 pillow, 23 Murray (Ray), 24 delay, 
 25 Jacob, 26 buggy, 27 beg, 28 mope, 29 rush (ray), 30 veto, 
 31 revoke (ray), 32 enough, 33 oar (ar), 34 rope (ray), 
 35 both, 36 four (ar), 37 money. 
 
 25. As in the first lesson, when the student is able to 
 write these words correctly, he should then write them a 
 sufficient number of times to enable him to write the entire 
 thirty-seven words in a minute and a half. He should also 
 read the Shorthand outlines over and over again until he 
 can read the list in the same length of time. 
 
 LESSON III. 
 
 SHAY AND EL. 
 
 i. Ish, representing the sound of sh, as explained in 
 lesson two, is always written with a downward stroke. The 
 
io PITMANIC 
 
 sound of &h, however, is sometimes represented by a letter 
 exactly like ish, except that it is written with an upward 
 stroke. For convenience in referring -to this letter it is 
 called shay. Ish is the letter generally used to represent 
 the sound of sh. Shay is used only in exceptional cases, 
 as follows : 
 
 (1) When the outline for a word containing the sound 
 of sh may be more quickly written by the use of shay, as 
 in lavish, written lay-ve-shay, and ravish, written ray-ve- 
 shay. 
 
 (2) When an outline may be kept from going the length 
 of two or more letters below the line on which one is writing, 
 as in bishop, written be-shay-pe. This keeps the outline 
 entirely above the line on which one is writing, when, if 
 ish were used, pe, the last letter in the word, would end 
 the length of two letters below the line. 
 
 2. Lay, representing the sound of 1, is written upward. 
 The sound of 1 is sometimes represented by a letter exactly 
 like lay except that it is written with a downward stroke. 
 The letter is called el. 
 
 3. The following rules govern the use of lay and el: 
 
 1 i ) When 1 is the first consonant in a word, lay is used 
 if no vowel precedes, and el is used if a vowel precedes. 
 Thus lame is written lay-em; elm, el-em; lake, lay-kay; 
 alike, el-kay. 
 
 (2) When 1 is the last consonant in a word, lay is used 
 if a sounded vowel follows, and el is used if 1 is the last 
 letter or if a sileni vowel follows. Thus jail is written 
 jay-el; jelly, jay-lay; tale, te-el; tally, te-lay. 
 
 (3) When 1 occurs between two other consonants in 
 a word, use the one which forms the better outline. If 
 either forms a good angle, select the one which will bring 
 
SHORTHAND 11 
 
 your outline more nearly upon the line on which you are 
 writing. 
 
 4. There are two exceptions to these rules. 
 
 (1) Always use el when it follows and is joined to en 
 or ing. The reason for this exception is that el forms a 
 more easily and quickly made junction with a preceding 
 ing or en. Thus inlay is written en-el ; kingly, kay-ing-el. 
 
 (2) When 1 is the only consonant stroke in a word lay 
 is always used. This exception is made so that in case it 
 is the only consonant stroke in the word and it becomes nec- 
 essary to use a vowel (which use will be explained later) 
 with this stroke, the student will know, when he comes to 
 read his notes, which is the beginning and which the end 
 of the letter. This is necessary, as will plainly appear 
 when the vowels are understood. 
 
 5. The following words illustrate the use of ish, shay v , 
 el and lay. 
 
 
 shape gush bishop lavish lake alike 
 
 \\r \ 
 
 fellow denial bale pillow dial delay mellow 
 
 EXERCISE 3. 
 6. List Words. (43 1:15.) 
 
 i Bishop, 2 shape, 3 lavish, 4 shapely, 5 shame, 6 knavish, 
 7 fishing, 8 ravish (ray), 9 alum, 10 elk, n alimony, 
 12 elegy, 13 elm, 14 Elsie, 15 Duluth, 16 mail, 17 bail, 
 18 tail, 19 mole, 20 fail, 21 herring (ray), 22 coal, 23 entail, 
 
12 PITMANIC 
 
 24 gale, 25 pole, 26 lake, 27 ledge, 28 fell, 29 Cora (ray). 
 30 bale, 31 toll, 32 unlike, 33 nailing, 34 Nellie, 35 renewal 
 (ray), 36 kneeling, 37 denial, 38 Toledo, 39 dale, 40 revenge 
 (ray), 41 name, 42 hay, 43 layer (ar). 
 
 7. The student should in all his practice bear in mind 
 that correctness is of first importance. Speed, while very 
 desirable, must not take the place of legible writing, for 
 of what use is matter written at high speed if it cannot 
 afterwards be read? 
 
 LESSON IV. 
 
 RAY AND AR. 
 
 i. The sound of r is represented by both ar and ray. 
 The following are the rules governing the use of ar and 
 ray: 
 
 1 i ) When r is the first consonant in a word and is also 
 the first letter, ray is used, as in rake, written ray-kay; 
 ring, ray-ing ; rash, ray-ish. When r is the first consonant 
 in a word and a vowel precedes, ar is used, as in ark, written 
 ar-kay; argue, ar-gay. 
 
 (2) When r is the last consonant in a word and a 
 sounded vowel follows, ray is used, as in dairy, written 
 de-ray; fairy, ei-ray. When r is the last consonant in a 
 word and a silent vowel follows or the last letter in the 
 word, ar is used, as in bore, written be-ar; chair, chay-ar; 
 unfair, en-ef-ar. 
 
 (3) When r occurs between two other consonants in 
 a word, use whichever sign for r makes the better outline. 
 When the use of either makes an equally good outline then 
 select the one which will keep the outline of the word more 
 
SHORTHAND 13 
 
 nearly upon the line, as in pouring, written pe-ray-ing; 
 bark, be-ray-kay; cork, kay-ray-kay; lyric, lay-ar-kay; 
 forge, ef-ray-jay. 
 
 2. The above are the general rules. There are a num- 
 ber of exceptions made necessary in order to secure better 
 angles between the different letters of an outline, or to 
 secure outlines which may be written more quickly. These 
 exceptions are : 
 
 1 i ) To secure better angles. 
 
 (a) Always use ray when r immediately precedes 
 ef, ve, ith, the, ish, zhe, te, de, chay or jay, 
 as in arrive, earth, Irish, arch. 
 
 (b) Always use ar when r immediately precedes 
 em, as in roam, farm. 
 
 (c) Always use ray when r immediately follows 
 em, as in mire. 
 
 (2) To secure more rapidly written outlines. 
 
 fa) Always use ray after hay, as in adhere, mo- 
 hair. 
 
 (b) Always use ray-ray when two r's occur in 
 succession, as roar, mirror. 
 
 3. The student will occasionally encounter words where 
 it will be clearly evident that better angles may be gained 
 by slightly varying some one of these rules. In core, for 
 example, ray is used though the rule calls for ar. The 
 student should make exceptions of this sort only when it is 
 clearly apparent that decidedly better angles or greater 
 speed may be gained. 
 
 4. When the stroke hay is preceded by another conso- 
 nant in a word the hook is formed by slightly retracing the 
 preceding letter, as in adhere. 
 
 5. The uses of ar and ray are illustrated as follows: 
 
14 PITMANIC 
 
 argue rake bore bury pork lyric 
 
 forum merry roar arrayed aright urge 
 
 arrive earth - horror roach 
 
 EXERCISE 4. 
 
 6. List Words. (62 i :3o.) 
 
 i Rung, 2 tore, 3 ferry, 4 rug, 5 carry, 6 marrow, 7 road, 
 8 ready, 9 wreck, 10 urge, n tarry, 12 fore, 13 argue, 14 err, 
 15 bug, 1 6 army, 17 berry, 18 fairy, 19 repair, 20 cherry, 
 21 Toledo, 22 roach, 23 review, 24 red, 25 gory, 26 jury, 
 27 pug, 28 rape, 29 rub, 30 ergo, 31 fur, 32 pour, 33 door, 
 34 burr, 35 fame, 36 chore, 37 carrying, 38 bury, 39 pork, 
 40 dole, 41 arrive, 42 earth, 43 orate, 44 arid, 45 Irish, 
 46 curry, 47 rush, 48 merry, 49 adhere, 50 rarify, 51 mirror, 
 52 bowl, 53 robe, 54 inform, 55 away, 56 enough, 57 us, 
 58 hurry, 59 Tillie, 60 along, 61 heavy, 62 toll. 
 
 7. The student should write the exercises slowly at first 
 being especially careful to form each outline correctly. When 
 he is able to write the exercises correctly, he should write 
 them over and over again with constantly increasing speed 
 until he becomes able to write them within the time specified. 
 
 8. Until the student has completed all the lessons in 
 the book, he should, in his practice, confine himself to the 
 exercises given herein. By so doin*g he will not form the 
 habit of writing words incorrectly as he necessarily would, 
 if he were to attempt to write miscellaneous matter before 
 all the principles are learned. 
 
SHORTHAND 15 
 
 LESSON V. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 (1) Name all the straight letters. 
 
 (2) Give two words illustrating the use of each. 
 
 (3) Which straight letters are always written down- 
 ward? 
 
 (4) Which with upward strokes? 
 
 (5) Which with horizontal strokes? 
 
 (6) Which should have the greater slant, ray or chay? 
 
 (7) Which part of a word is written and which part 
 usually omitted in Shorthand writing? 
 
 (8) In writing the Shorthand outline for a word what 
 is the rule which specifies at what point the outline should 
 begin ? 
 
 (9) In writing the outline for a word where should 
 the second and each following stroke begin ? 
 
 ( 10) Why is it important that all consonant strokes 
 should be written of uniform length? 
 
 (n) How should the pen or pencil be held when 
 writing Shorthand? 
 
 (12) In reading Shorthand writing how can one dis- 
 tinguish which is the proper word when an outline is the 
 same for two or more words? 
 
 (13) How many curved letters are there? 
 
 (14) Name them. 
 
 (15) Give two words illustrating the use of each. 
 
 (16) Which curved letters are written downward, 
 which upward, and which with a horizontal stroke? 
 
 (17) What is the significance of the numbers in pa- 
 rentheses immediately preceding the exercises in each lesson? 
 
16 PITMANIC 
 
 (18) By what two letters is the sound of sh repre- 
 sented ? 
 
 (19) Which of these two letters is more commonly 
 used? 
 
 (20) How are these letters distinguished from each 
 other ? 
 
 (21) Give the rules governing the use of shay. 
 
 (22) If the sound of sh is the only consonant in a 
 word, which should be used, ish or shay? 
 
 (23) By what two letters is the sound of 1 repre- 
 sented ? 
 
 (24) How do these letters differ from each other? 
 
 (25) When 1 is the first consonant in a word when 
 should one use lay and when el? 
 
 (26) When 1 is the last consonant, when is lay and 
 when is el used? 
 
 (27) After what letters is el always used? 
 
 (28) When 1 is the only consonant stroke in a word 
 is lay or el used ? 
 
 (29) By what two letters is the sound of r repre- 
 sented ? 
 
 (30) When r is the first consonant in a word when 
 should ar and when should ray be used ? Give examples. 
 
 (31) When r is the last consonant in a word when 
 should ray and when should ar be used ? Give examples. 
 
 (32) When r occurs between two other consonants 
 in an outline when should you use ray and when ar? 
 
 (33) Give the exceptions to the above rules. 
 
 2. The following words should be written at dictation 
 again and again until they may be written legibly within 
 the time specified. 
 
SHORTHAND 17 
 
 EXERCISE 5. 
 
 3. List Words. (106 1:45.) 
 
 Duck peck cake check rake poet ditto page rage body 
 deputy go bake gage bedeck touch copy budge judge pity 
 tuck wreck poke edit keg 25 tub carry fame roach wrote 
 hedge rug rope peg many lame shape death easy bunk lathe 
 yoke wake argue escape neck poking gum tame tidy 50 daily 
 pillow shapely knavish fishing ravish alum elk alimony elegy- 
 elm Elsie mail bail tail coal gale pole lake ledge fell Cora 
 unlike Nellie renewal 75 denial dale name rung ferry rug 
 road marrow ready urge tarry err bug army berry repair 
 review gory jury rape rub pour pork arrive earth 100 arid 
 Irish adhere rarifv mirror bowl. 100 
 
 LESSON VI. 
 
 WORDSIGNS. 
 
 i. A scheme of abbreviation somewhat similar to that 
 used for certain words in Longhand is made use of in 
 writing Shorthand. There are two important differences 
 between Longhand and Shorthand abbreviations. 
 
 (i) Only the very commonly occurring words are rep- 
 resented in Shorthand by abbreviated outlines, such as. 
 of, to, for, as, will, him, the, your, shall, is, has, have, 
 think, which, etc. In Longhand, the words which are 
 abbreviated are words which seldom occur in ordinary use. 
 One may, for example, read an entire column of ordinary 
 newspaper matter and not find half a dozen abbreviated 
 words. The same matter written in Shorthand would re- 
 quire abbreviations, or wordsigns, as they are called, for 
 at least one word in everv three or four.. 
 
i8 PITMANIC 
 
 (2) In Longhand, words for which we have abbrevia- 
 tions, such as doctor, attorney, Missouri, ounce, pound, 
 etc., are quite as frequently written out in full as they are 
 represented by the abbreviated forms. In Shorthand every 
 word for which there is an abbreviation, or wordsign, is 
 always written with the sign and never in any case repre- 
 sented by the complete consonant outline. 
 
 2. Words derived from primitives, for which there are 
 wordsigns, are written with the sign for the primitive and 
 the necessary consonants to complete the derivative. For 
 example, come is written with kay only instead of the full 
 outline kay-em. Coming, therefore, is written kay-ing, 
 while income is written en-kay. 
 
 3. With very few exceptions wordsigns are composed 
 of some one or more of the consonant parts of the complete 
 consonant outline for the word represented by the sign. 
 There are a few words in the writing of which it has been 
 found necessary to vary some rule in order to avoid a con- 
 flict as, for example, the use of pe-ray for pure. This is done 
 to prevent confusion with pe-ar which is the outline for 
 poor. Hence pe-ray is given as a wordsign for pure. 
 
 4. There is given in this and each of the following les- 
 sons a short list of wordsigns which the student should 
 thoroughly commit to memory. 
 
 EXERCISE 6. 
 
 5. List Words. (50 1:15.) 
 
 T Make, 2 picnic, 3 copy, 4 cub, 5 gage, 6 puck, 7 bay, 
 8 tape, 9 Mattie, 10 lady, n folly, 12 jug, 13 comic, 14 navy, 
 15 heavy, 16 many, 17 honey, 18 assume, 19 edge, 20 keg, 
 21 gay, 22 lave, 23 loaf, 24 pity, 25 comedy, 26 poke, 
 27 deck, 28 rote, 29 making, 30 rub, 31 guinea, 32 luck, 
 33 cope, 34 choke, 35 joke, 36 cage, 37 rage, 38 army, 
 
SHORTHAND 19 
 
 39 ferry, 40 bathe, 41 delay, 42 doing, 43 jury, 44 hurry, 
 45 power, 46 pug, 47 beck, 48 Jerry, 49 rogue, 50 jockey. 
 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 ( ) J I L / J ( 
 
 them was shall have for which come usual think essential 
 
 usually essentially 
 
 together never your he especial are regular irregular 
 
 especially 
 
 become 
 
 notwith- peculiar New-York will him 
 
 standing peculiarity 
 
 7. The student of Shorthand should not confine himself 
 in practice either to a pen or pencil. He should accustom 
 himself to the use of both. When using a pen he should 
 select one that is adapted to his touch. It should be a 
 short-nibbed pen, not a stub, and yet not one with too fine 
 a point. The pen with which the student can readily shade 
 letters and yet not so flexible that he will shade letters unin- 
 tentionally, is the pen to use. Each one must be his own 
 judge in this matter since people vary so greatly in their 
 touch in writing. 
 
 8. Usually much better and more satisfactory work may 
 be done with a good short-nibbed gold pen. When writing 
 with a pencil, a rather soft and fine-grained lead should 
 be selected. Both pen and pencil should be held more near- 
 ly upright than in writing Longhand. With the pen or 
 pencil so held, one is less apt to shade letters unintention- 
 ally. 
 
 9. It will interest the student to know that there are, in 
 this text, 440 wordsigns and 234 phrase signs, and 14 
 
20 PITMANIC 
 
 signs representing both a single word and a phrase. This 
 makes a total of 688. 
 
 10. Since a number of the signs are used for two or 
 more words, the actual number of words and phrases repre- 
 sented by abbreviated signs is 833. 
 
 11. The use of wordsigns as part of the outlines of 
 words derived from words for which there are abbreviations, 
 makes it possible for the reporter to shorten many hundreds 
 of words for which he does not need to learn wordsigns. 
 
 LESSON VII. 
 
 PHRASING. 
 
 i. In Shorthand the outlines for words are frequently 
 joined : that is, the outlines for two or more words are 
 written without lifting the pen or pencil from the paper. 
 ^A considerable degree of speed is gained in this way. For 
 example, in the sentence, you-never-will come-back, en in 
 never should be joined to the wordsign for you. Lay, 
 which is the wordsign for will, should begin at the end of 
 ve, the last letter in the wordsign for never, all three 
 words joined by hyphens being written without lifting the 
 pen from the paper. The be in back should begin at the 
 end of kay, the wordsign for come. Thus, in writing the 
 sentence above, while all the words might be written sepa- 
 rately, the pen need be lifted from the paper but once in 
 writing the outlines for the five words. It will be noticed 
 that the words never, will and back, when joined as above, 
 are written below, or through the line. This is inevitable 
 where words are phrased. Had they been written sepa- 
 rately, it would have been necessary to begin each outline 
 
SHORTHAND 21 
 
 so that the first upright letter in each word in which there 
 were upright letters would rest on the line. 
 
 2. The following rules should be observed in the use 
 of the principle of phrasing: 
 
 (1) The first word in a phrase, except in the case of 
 certain ticks explained in the latter part of this lesson, should 
 be written in the same position in which it would be placed 
 were it written without joining. All the other words joined 
 after the initial word, or leader, as it is called, are written 
 without any reference to the line upon which the writing 
 is being clone. 
 
 (2) Words should never be joined when the last stroke 
 in the preceding word does not make a distinct angle with 
 the first stroke in the following word. 
 
 (3) The last word in one sentence should never be 
 joined to the first word of the following sentence, and, as 
 a rule, words separated by any grammatical or rhetorical 
 pause, should not be phrased. 
 
 (4) Proper names should never be joined to words 
 preceding or following them. 
 
 3. In order to form a better angle the wordsign for 
 you may be inverted when phrased to any letter with which 
 it would not form a good angle when written in the usual 
 way, as in you-know and you-never, the sign for you 
 should be inverted. 
 
 4. Beginners, as a rule, have a tendency to phrase too 
 much. To overcome this, students, until they have com- 
 pleted this book, should phrase only such words as are con- 
 nected by hyphens in the following exercises. This will 
 give the beginner a sufficient insight into the general plan 
 of joining words and also actual practice in phrasing. 
 
 5. The character at the end of the sixth and ninth sen- 
 tences in the exercise to be translated from Shorthand at 
 
22 PITMANIC 
 
 the close of this lesson is the Shorthand interrogation 
 point. The wordsign for that is a half length stroke the. 
 
 EXERCISE 7. 
 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 I, high, the a, an, advan- Ian- help popular familiar efficient 
 aye, eve / and tage guage 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 November health chapter object change dignity faithful in 
 
 faithfully any 
 
 Illegible legible perform rather reprefient-ed reform that ye 
 
 representative year-s. 
 
 7. In order to make use of a few very commonly occur- 
 ring words in the preparation of the exercises, before the 
 principles by which these words are written could be intro- 
 duced, they are, with their proper outlines, given as word- 
 signs. The word that is an illustration. The sign given 
 is really a full outline, as will appear in lesson 41. 
 
 8. The, a, an, and and he, have another set of signs in 
 addition to the signs already given. They are the only 
 words each of which has two wordsigns. The reason for 
 this is explained as follows : These are the most frequently 
 occurring words in the language, hence they are usually 
 represented by what are called ticks, the simplest and most 
 quickly written characters which can be formed in connec- 
 tion with other outlines. They are never used unless joined 
 
SHORTHAND 23 
 
 to other outlines. It sometimes occurs that these ticks 
 cannot be phrased, hence the necessity of the signs already 
 given for these words, which are used without joining, and 
 which are the most quickly formed disjoined characters. 
 These disjoined signs are called emergency signs because 
 they are used only in emergencies where the tick signs can- 
 not be easily and readily joined or some rule of phrasing 
 prevents their being joined. 
 
 9. Since these words occur so very frequently, especial 
 care should be given to firmly fix in the mind each set of 
 these signs. The tick signs are explained as follows : 
 
 (1) When joined the sign for the is a tick like either 
 the first or last half of the sign for I, that is a slanting tick. 
 It is written either upward or downward. The writer 
 should always select the one of these slanting ticks which 
 makes a distinct angle with the word to which it is joined. 
 \Yhere any slanting tick will make a distinct angle with the 
 letter to which it is joined, the one which may be the more 
 quickly written should be used. Thus : the-day, the-mon- 
 ey, the-name, are written as shown in the illustration in 
 section 15 in this lesson. In the-day, for example, any 
 slanting tick would have made a distinct angle with de. 
 A tick like the last half of the sign for I, written upwards, 
 should be used because it is the most quickly written. 
 
 (2) A, an and and, are represented, when joined, by a 
 horizontal or vertical tick, the sense always clearly indi- 
 cating which one of the three words is meant. One should 
 always select the tick which forms an angle with the word 
 to which it is phrased. Thus : a-day, and-go, and-will, an- 
 enemy, are written as illustrated below. When either the 
 vertical or the horizontal tick makes a distinct angle, the 
 latter is, in most cases, preferable, since it is made in the 
 direction in which one is writing. As will be seen from the 
 
24 PITMANIC 
 
 illustrations, the vertical tick for a, an or and is always 
 written downwards and the horizontal tick from left to 
 right. 
 
 (3) He, when joined, is represented by a slanting tick 
 like the last half of the sign for I. It is always written 
 with a downward stroke. Thus : he-will and he-may are 
 written as shown below. 
 
 10. The joined signs of a, an, and, the and he have 
 no position of their own. Their position is governed by 
 the words to which they are phrased. Hence, when a 
 phrase begins with any one of these words, the second of 
 the joined words is the leader and is written in the same 
 position in which it would be placed if it were standing 
 alone. 
 
 11. The, a and an usually begin a phrase and are joined 
 to the following word rather than to the preceding word at 
 the end of a phrase, since these words belong, gramatically, 
 to the following words. This rule, however, is not strictly 
 observed. He, also, is usually joined to the following word. 
 And is joined to either the preceding or following word 
 since it belongs, grammatically, to both. 
 
 12. For convenience in referring to these tick signs, 
 and also those in lesson nine, they are usually called by the 
 name of the letter made in the same direction as the tick. 
 Thus, the tick for the made in the same direction as the 
 stroke pe is spoken of as a pe-tick ; when made in the same 
 direction as the stroke ray, it is called a ray-tick; when a 
 shaded tick is made in the same direction as the stroke jay, 
 it is called a jay-tick, etc. 
 
 13. When for any reason it is not convenient, or any 
 of the rules for phrasing make it impossible to use the 
 ticks for these words, then the signs given in the list of 
 wordsigns are used and must be written in the position in 
 
SHORTHAND 25 
 
 which they are there given. It should be kept in mind, 
 however, that the joined signs for these five words should 
 always be used when it is possible to join them because 
 speed is gained by their use. 
 
 14. It is customary to use only one of the two ticks in 
 the wordsign for I when this word is phrased, that half 
 which will make the better angle with the word to which 
 it is joined being selected. When the first half only is 
 used, it must always be written downwards, and the last 
 half, when used, is written upwards. The only other tick 
 with which it is identical is that for the word the and the 
 sense will always make it perfectly clear whether I or the 
 is meant. The tick sign for he is always written down- 
 wards hence cannot possibly conflict with the last half of 
 the sign for I when joined as the latter is always written 
 upwards. 
 
 15. The stroke hay for he is sometimes phrased. This 
 is permissable only when both of the following conditions 
 exist: (i) When the tick sign for he does not make a 
 good angle and (2), when hay, the emergency sign for 
 he does, as in he-that. It is only rarely, however, that the 
 wordsign hay for he is phrased with other words. 
 
 1 6. The following examples of phrasing illustrate the 
 principles mentioned above : 
 
 / i r i^ ^ /* 
 
 . I V- +^^> /\ i ^- N \ ^.. I v ^ > I/ *- *> *- 
 
 the- the- the- a- and- and- an- he- he- he- 
 
 day money name day go will enemy will may that 
 
 17. Phrases. (69 1:05.) 
 
 i Will-you-come, 2 he-may-go, 3 may-you-come, 4 have- 
 you-many, 5 a-day-may-come, 6 I-think-you-will, 7 I-will, 
 8 he-will-make,- 5 9 the-advantage, 10 you-may-help, n the- 
 
26 PITMANIC 
 
 day, 12 the-change, 13 help-him, 14 I-object, 15 an-illegible, 
 16 perform-your, 17 the-chapter, 18 your-health, 19 and- 
 rather, 20 will-think, 50 21 you-reform-them, 22 the-legible- 
 copy, 23 you-represent, 24 the-language, 25 the-popular, 
 26 take-him, 27 they-may-go, 28 I-perform. 69 
 
 18. Sentences. (65 1 105.) 
 
 i I-will go and-take-your-money. 2 You-say you-know 
 he-will go away? 3 The-copy was-so illegible he-will take- 
 it away. 25 4 He-will-take your heavy-team. 5 He-came 
 in November and-will perform in New- York. 6 I-know 
 you-will-have money-enough for-your 50 November pay-day. 
 7 You-may take-him along for I-think he-will-be popular. 65 
 
 19. It is especially important that the student when 
 phrasing should keep constantly in mind rule two, given 
 in section 2 of this lesson. This refers to angles which may 
 be formed distinctly and at the same time written rapidly. 
 It frequently happens that two words may be joined and a 
 sufficiently clear angle made between them if written slowly, 
 while, if written rapidly, it could not be distinctly formed. 
 For example, pay-enough might be joined and a fairly 
 distinct angle formed between pe and en, if the outline 
 were written slowly. Such distinction could not possibly 
 be clearly made when writing at a high rate of speed. A 
 little care and observation on the part of the student in 
 such cases will prevent his attempting to join words which 
 should not be phrased. 
 
 20. After the student is sure that he has the proper read- 
 ing of the Shorthand exercise to be translated, it is an 
 excellent plan for him to copy the whole of it many times. 
 This will afford splendid drill in the rapid formation of 
 Shorthand characters. Such practice should always be upon 
 matter which the student knows to be correct. The stu- 
 dent should write these exercises over and over again until 
 
SHORTHAND 27 
 
 he is able to form the characters neatly and correctly at a 
 rate of sixty words per minute. If he is able to attain a 
 higher rate and at the same time form his characters dis- 
 tinctly, giving them the proper curve, length, slant and 
 shade, so much the better. 
 21. Translation. 
 
 
 
 IK 
 LESSON VIII. 
 
 THE S-CIRCI,E. 
 
 I. The sounds, represented by the strokes es and ze, 
 are also frequently represented by a small circle called the 
 s-circle. This form of writing s and z is used only in con- 
 nection with some other consonant stroke, except in the 
 case of the wordsigns "is," "his," "as," "has," given in this 
 lesson. It may be joined to the beginning or end of any 
 stroke either curved or straight, except at the beginning of 
 hay. When written upon curved strokes, and does not 
 occur between strokes, it is formed within the curve. When 
 
28 PITMANIC 
 
 written upon straight letters, and does not occur between 
 strokes, it must be paced upon the right side of downward 
 strokes, upon the left side of upward strokes and on the 
 upper side of horizontal letters. To illustrate, the follow- 
 ing words are written thus : 
 
 v r 
 
 ease face safe base stay mace same sung race days 
 
 2. When the s-circle is written between two straight 
 letters which form an angle at their junction, it is written 
 on the outside of the angle, as in desk; when it comes 
 between a straight and a curved letter it follows the curve, 
 as in passive, and when it occurs between two curved letters 
 it follows both curves, if both curve in the same direction, 
 as in nuisance. When it cannot follow both curves, it may 
 come within either the one or the other, as in mason and 
 facility, thus: 
 
 rusty desk passive nuisance fasten mason facility cousin 
 
 3. For convenience in referring to s or z when the circle 
 is used it is pronounced as if it were spelled iss. 
 
 4. When s or z comes between a sound represented by 
 a curved stroke and an 1, an exception may be made to the 
 rules for the use of el or lay, if thereby the s-circle, coming 
 between the strokes, may be made to come within both 
 curves. For example, missile is written em-iss-lay al- 
 though the rule calls for the use of el ; lesson is written el- 
 iss-en. 
 
 5. The rules governing the use of the stroke es or ze 
 and the circle iss for s or z are as follows : 
 
29 
 
 (i) When s or z is the first consonant in a word and 
 is not preceded by a vowel the circle is used, and when a 
 vowel precedes, the stroke es or ze is written, thus: 
 
 sale assail sake espy some assume sun assignee 
 
 (2) When s or z is the last consonant in a word and 
 a sounded vowel follows, or when two separately pronounced 
 vowels immediately precede, the stroke is used; when not 
 followed by a sounded vowel or when a silent vowel follows, 
 the circle is used, thus : 
 
 S /) y- V) ^-Q i i ^ 
 
 race racy police policy nose noisy fuss fussy Lots 
 
 ( 3 ) When s or z occurs between two consonant strokes 
 in a word the circle is used, except when it is not possible 
 or easy to write the circle. In such cases the stroke es or 
 ze is used. 
 
 6. Usually it is not best to begin a phrase with an s-cir- 
 cle standing for is, his, as or has since, in translating rap- 
 idly, it is apt to be taken for a simple s beginning some 
 word, and hence cause a halt in the reading. In phrases like 
 as-that, as-he, is-that, etc., the s-circle may begin a phrase 
 and no trouble will follow in translating. 
 
 EXERC4SE 8. 
 
 7. List Words. (60 i :i5.) 
 
 i Case, 2 face, 3 safe, 4 slave, 5 vase, 6 pace, 7 soap, 
 8 muss, 9 knows, 10 mason, TI vessel, 12 mislay, 13 slope, 
 14 fizzle, 15 speck, 16 some, 17 snow, 18 casing, 19 guessing, 
 
30 PITMANIC 
 
 20 base, 21 goes, 22 toes, 23 gaze, 24 race, 25 reason. 
 26 stay, 27 foes, 28 ways, 29 yes, 30 losing, 31 facing, 
 32 museum, 33 insane, 34 muzzle, 35 casual, 36 resign, 
 37 chosen, 38 basin, 39 unseat, 40 noisome, 41 gossip, 
 42 recipe, 43 nuisance, 44 Mexico, 45 desk, 46 discuss, 
 47 dismay, 48 disown, 49 missing, 50 inside, 51 chosing, 
 52 disobey, 53 insanity, 54 Minnesota, 55 loosen, 56 Thomas, 
 57 surface, 58 swung, 59 suppose, 60 slow. 
 8. Wordsigns. 
 
 7 
 
 \ 
 
 as, has is, his always acknowledge New-York-City public knowledge 
 
 publish 
 published 
 
 , U 
 
 several special subject something sufficient advantageous 
 
 Savior spoke sufficiently 
 
 "^TV ^r 
 
 electric for-the-purpoee-of February forsake January 
 
 electricity for-the-sake-of 
 
 g. Phrases. (60 i :oo.) 
 
 i He-has-come, 2 he-is-away, 3 is-that-yours, 4 he-may- 
 acknowledge, 5 several-days, 6 special-case, 7 will-take-some- 
 thing, 8 have-no-knowledge, 9 will-be-sufficient, 25 10 will- 
 forsake-him, n may-always-be, 12 make-him-stay, 13 in- 
 the-museum, 14 will-disown-them, 15 was-some-reason, 16 
 a-high-desk, 17 will-discuss-the-case, 50 18 he-was-insane, 19 
 will-stay-away, 20 disobey-him, 21 many- foes. 60 
 
 10. Sentences. (103 1:40.) 
 
 i The-slave will-take-your music-box into-the-city. 2 
 Will-you-acknowledge he-has some-rights in-such a-case? 
 
SHORTHAND 31 
 
 3 He-will forsake-you. 25 4 He-has-no knowledge that will 
 help us in-this-case. 5 The-police will arrive Saturday, 
 and-take Thomas Jackson into custody. 6 In January 
 James 50 will arrive in New-York-City, and-will-take pas- 
 sage for Cuba. 7 That-is sufficient so-you-may go-ahead. 
 8 Several public officers will-take 75 the-electric road tot 
 Jackson. 9 Somebody may-carry Nellie Johnson's music- 
 book away. 10 He- will always stay in Chicago, Illinois, 
 and- will-be a-subject 100 for the-asylum. 103 
 
 11. In translating Shorthand writing, the student will 
 be able to make more rapid progress, if, when he comes to 
 an outline which troubles him, he will not stop and puzzle 
 over it, but will drop it for the time and go on until he 
 gets the connection. By doing this the difficult word or 
 phrase will in almost every instance come to him without 
 further effort. 
 
 12. Translation, 
 
32 PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON IX. 
 
 LONG VOWELS. 
 
 1. As has already been stated, the vowels are not usually 
 inserted in Shorthand outlines. It is seldom necessary to 
 actually insert or indicate a vowel except : 
 
 1 i ) In cases where a word is used in some unusual way. 
 
 (2) Where an unusual word occurs. , 
 
 (3) In the very few instances where the consonant out- 
 line is the same for two or more words any one of which 
 would make sense. 
 
 In such cases an outline may be made perfectly clear by 
 inserting or indicating the principal or accented vowel in 
 the word. In order to insert or indicate vowels readily in 
 the rare instances where legibility requires their use, they 
 must be learned thoroughly. The vowels are represented 
 by light and heavy dots and dashes placed beside the con- 
 sonant strokes. 
 
 2. They are designated as first, second and third place 
 vowels, that is, a dot or a dash placed beside the beginning 
 of a stroke is called a first place vowel. A dot or dash 
 placed beside the middle of a stroke is called a second place 
 vowel and a dot or a dash placed beside the end of a stroke 
 is called a third place vowel. 
 
 3. Long vowels are represented by heavy dots and 
 dashes. 
 
 4. The long vowels given in this lesson are as follows: 
 E, as in see, first place dot ; a, as in dame, second place 
 
 dot; a, as in park, third place dot; aw, as in saw, first 
 place dash; o, as in low, second place dash; oo, as in 
 cool, third place dash. 
 
 5. The student should note particularly that a first 
 
SHORTHAND 33 
 
 place vowel, if written beside letters made with an up- 
 ward stroke as hay, lay or ray, is written at the lower end 
 of these letters since first place vowels are placed at the 
 beginning of strokes and not necessarily at the top of up- 
 right letters. 
 
 6. The following words will show the different posi- 
 tions of the long vowels : 
 
 See peek dame aid barge palm saw paw low poke cool coop 
 
 7. It will be seen that the dashes are written at right 
 angles to the strokes with which they occur. They should 
 always be so placed. When a vowel comes before an up- 
 right consonant it should be written to the left and when it 
 follows, to the right of the consonant stroke. When a 
 vowel precedes a horizontal letter it is written above and 
 when it follows, it is placed below the consonant stroke. 
 
 8. When a vowel occurs between two consonants it 
 becomes possible to write it either following and beside 
 the first stroke or preceding and beside the second stroke. 
 The following rules should be observed in writing long 
 vowels, when they occur between two consonants and it 
 becomes necessary to insert them : 
 
 (1) When a first place or second place long vowel 
 is used between two consonants, it should be placed beside 
 and after the first of the two strokes, as in peek, dame, poke. 
 
 (2) When a third place long vowel is used between 
 two consonants it should be placed beside and before the 
 second of the strokes between which it occurs, as in barge, 
 cool. 
 
 9. These rules should be thoroughly committed to mem- 
 orv since the vowels are so seldom used that the rules relat- 
 
34 PITMANIC 
 
 ing to them will easily be forgotten unless firmly fixed in 
 the mind. 
 
 10. The reasons for always placing all first place vowels 
 beside the first and all third place vowels beside the second 
 stroke when used between two consonants is to avoid having 
 vowels occur in angles. In such a position it would be 
 impossible to tell whether a vowel is intended as a third 
 place vowel beside the first stroke or a first place vowel 
 beside the second. 
 
 11. For practice in the use of the vowels, the list words 
 in this lesson are to be written from fifty to one hundred 
 times, if need be, to enable the student to write them readily 
 and accurately in the time specified. They should be read 
 as often as written. The student should understand that the 
 words in this lesson are not usually vocalized. They are 
 given merely for the purpose of giving the student practice 
 in inserting the vowels. Section one in this lesson explains 
 when the accented vowel should be inserted in an outline. 
 
 EXERCISE 9. 
 
 12. List Words. (40 2:15.) 
 
 i Jaw, 2 sue, 3 tomb, 4 pay, 5 no, 6 may, 7 heap, 8 gape, 
 9 peep, 10 league, n team, 12 ream, 13 tjfr, 14 tool, 15 peak, 
 16 poke, 17 rope, 18 bar, 19 rogue, 20 reek, 21 cape, 22 roam, 
 23 calm, 24 lark, 25 pale, 26 gale, 27 pojjr, 28 knoll, 29 joke, 
 30 Paul, 31 porch, 32 make, 33 vale, 34 oat, 35 sheep, 
 36 kneel, 37 coke, 38 vague, 39 bore, 40 tame. 
 
 13. The signs for on and should, in the following list 
 of wordsigns, are written with upward strokes. All the 
 other tick signs are written with downward strokes. 
 
SHORTHAND 35 
 
 14. Wordsigns. 
 
 of to or but on should all too already before ought who 
 
 two oh, owe 
 
 how much whom thing single ah awe magazine 
 
 home English 
 
 15. The word much is sometimes written in full (em- 
 chay). This is done when it is desired to phrase it and the 
 wordsign, chay, does not form a distinct angle with the 
 preceding- letter. For example, the phrase so-much, may 
 be written more quickly by joining the words and writing 
 much em-chay than to use chay alone for much and disjoin- 
 ing it, as would be necessary if chay, the wordsign for 
 much, were used. 
 
 1 6. Phrases. (60 i :oo.) 
 
 i Of-my, 2 of-that, 3 all-my-money, 4 to-make, 5 to-think. 
 6 to-choose, 7 to-arrive, 8 two-checks, 9 too-much-money, 
 10 br-go, TI already-going-back, 25 12 come-and-go, 13 be- 
 fore-going, 14 on-that, 15 on-that-day, 16 on-top, 17 you- 
 should-take, 18 before-that, 19 should-think, 20 who-came, 
 21 much-money, 22 how-many, 50 23 single-thing, 24 should- 
 take-it, 25 who-comes, 26 who-may-come. 60 
 
 17. Whenever possible, the student should have some 
 one read the exercises to him when he practices upon them, 
 since it is better for one to learn to write from dictation 
 than by copying. 
 
 18. Sentences. (104 1:45.) 
 
 i He-will sell all of-his potatoes in-the-city. 2 I-will re- 
 ceive many-times as-much for-my poem as James will for 
 
36 PITMANIC 
 
 his. 25 3 Is-he-coming and-how-many will he take? 
 4 They should-think of all things before they-leave. 5 I- 
 suppose he-will-never go. 6 They 50 pay a-low rate for coal. 
 
 7 You ought to-go and-take-your lesson in-this subject. 
 
 8 I-will-inform them of the-rate. 9 Joseph 75 should-talk 
 less or he-ought to-leave the-society. 10 I-am-going so 
 you-will have to-come away, n I rarely take-your car- 
 riage 100 as I-dislike-it. 104 
 
 19. Translation. 
 
 J"^ \ 'J- S**-^. ' 
 
 N 
 
 LESSON X. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 (i) What class of words are represented in Short- 
 hand by abbreviated outlines, or wordsigns? 
 
 (2} Are the Longhand abbreviations commonly used? 
 (3) About how many words are represented by ab- 
 
SHORTHAND 37 
 
 breviated outlines, or wordsigns, in Shorthand? 
 
 (4) Are the outlines for words, for which there are 
 wordsigns, ever written in full ? 
 
 (5) How do you write outlines for words derived 
 from primitives represented by wordsigns? Give four il- 
 lustrations. 
 
 (6) What part of the outline for a word, for which 
 there is a wordsign, usually constitutes the sign? 
 
 (7) What is the purpose of phrasing in Shorthand? 
 
 (8) When several words are joined by phrasing 
 which word governs the position of the phrase? 
 
 (9) What is the word which governs the position of 
 a phrase called? 
 
 ( 10) Can the second and following words of a phrase 
 be given any special position in reference to the line? 
 
 (n) What is the rule in regard to the angle which 
 must be made between the words in a phrase? 
 
 (12) Is it proper to phrase the last word in a sen- 
 tence with the first word in the following sentence? 
 
 (13) Should proper names ever be phrased with other 
 words ? 
 
 (14) What is the usual tendency with beginners in 
 the use of the principle of phrasing? 
 
 (15) What method has been adopted in this book to 
 give students proper practice in phrasing? 
 
 (16) Name the five words for which there are two 
 sets of wordsigns, 
 
 (17) What is the object of having two sets of signs 
 for each of these words? 
 
 (18) What effect does it have upon the leader of 
 a phrase to have it begin with one of the words which has 
 two signs? 
 
 (19) Which of these two sets of signs is the more 
 
 449532 
 
38 PITMANIC 
 
 commonly used? 
 
 (20) Describe each of the two signs for the words 
 which have two signs. 
 
 (21) When both of the tick signs for a, an or and 
 make a distinct angle with a word which should be given 
 the preference? 
 
 (22) In what direction is the tick sign for he always 
 written ? 
 
 (23) Why should the joined signs, or ticks, always 
 be used when it is possible to use them? 
 
 (24) When the wordsign for I is phrased how is it 
 usually written? 
 
 (25) Under what conditions is it allowable to use 
 the stroke hay for the word he in phrasing? Give an 
 example. 
 
 (26) In what way besides the use of the strokes es 
 and ze may the sounds of s and z be represented? 
 
 /- (27) Is the s-circle ever used to represent s or z 
 except when written in connection with some stroke? 
 >i_ (28) When used with straight letters upon which 
 side of the letters must it be written? 
 
 (29) Upon which side of curved letters? 
 
 (30) When the s-circle comes between two straight 
 letters which form an angle where is it written ? 
 
 (31) When between a straight and a curved letter ? 
 
 (32) When between two curved letters? 
 
 (33) In referring to the s-circle sign for s or z how 
 do we distinguish it from es or ze, the names of the strokes ? 
 
 (34) When s or z is the first consonant in a word 
 \vhen must the stroke and when must the circle be used? 
 
 (35) When s or z is the last consonant in a word 
 when must the stroke and when must the circle be used? 
 
 (36) When s or z comes between two other conso- 
 
SHORTHAND 39 
 
 nants in a word which sign is usually used? 
 
 (37) When iss comes between two curved letters one 
 of which represents the sound of 1, which is used, el or lay? 
 
 (38) In what cases is it necessary for vowels to be 
 inserted ? 
 
 (39) Name all the long vowels and describe the 
 character by which each is represented. 
 
 (40) What is meant by first place, second place and 
 third place vowels ? 
 
 (41) Is a first place vowel always written at the top 
 of upright consonants beside which it may be placed? 
 
 (42) How are the dash vowels written in reference 
 to the strokes beside which they are placed ? 
 
 (43) When a vowel is to be read before a consonant 
 on which side of upright and on which side of horizontal 
 letters must it be placed ? 
 
 (44) Where must a vowel be placed when it is to be 
 read after a consonant? 
 
 (45) When a first place long vowel is written be- 
 tween two consonants beside which must it be placed? 
 
 (46) When a second place long vowel is written 
 between two consonants where must it be placed ? 
 
 (47) W r hen a third place long vowel is written be- 
 tween two consonants beside which stroke must it be 
 written ? 
 
 (48) Why is it necessary to place third place long 
 vowels beside the second of the two consonants between 
 which they occur? 
 
 EXERCISE 10. 
 
 2. List Words. (48 :so.) 
 
 Picnic lady comic heavy honey assign edge keg comedy 
 poke guinea joke army ferry delay hurry power rogue face 
 
40 PITMANIC 
 
 slave knows mason noisome nuisance yes 25 muzzle resign 
 chosen basin fizzle guessing disown Minnesota suppose gape 
 poke rope rogue roam gale pour knoll joke porch vale 
 coke bore tame. 48 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 Y"Them, was, shall, have, for, which, come, usual, (usually,) 
 think, essential, (essentially,) together, never, your, he, 
 especial, (especially,) are, regular, irregular, become, you, 
 notwithstanding, peculiar, (peculiarity,) New- York, will, 
 him, I, (high, aye, eye,) the, a, (an, and,) advantage, lan- 
 guage, help, popular, familiar, efficient, November, health, 
 chapter, object, change, dignity, faithful, (faithfully,) in, 
 (any,) illegible, legible, perform, rather, represent; (repre- 
 sented, representative,) reform, that, ye, (year, years,) as, 
 (has,) is, (his,) always, acknowledge, New- York-City, pub- 
 lic, (publish, published,) knowledge, several, (Savior,) spec- 
 ial, (spoke,) subject, something, sufficient, (sufficiently,) 
 advantageous, electric, (electricity,) for-the-purpose-of, 
 February, forsake, (for-the-sake-of,) January, o,f, to, or, 
 but, on, should, all, too, (two,) already, before, (oh, owe,) 
 ought, who, how, much, whom, (home,) thing, (English,) 
 single, ah, awe, magazine. 
 
 4. Phrases. (50 :55.) 
 
 Will-you-come, he-may-go, may-you-come, have-you- 
 many, a-day-may-come, I-think-you-will, I-will, he-will- 
 make, 23 the-advantage, you-may-help, the-day, the-change, 
 help-him, I-object, an-illegible, perform-your, the-chapter, 
 your-health, and-rather, may-go. 50 
 
 5. Sentences. (139 2:20.) 
 
 i I-will go and-take-your-money. 2 You-say you-know 
 that he-will go away. 3 The-copy was-so illegible he-will 
 take-it. 1 '"' 4 He-will-take your heavy-team. 5 The-slave 
 will-take-vour music-box into-the-citv. 6 Will-vou-acknowl- 
 
SHORTHAND 41 
 
 edge he-has some-rights in-such 50 a-case? 7 He- will for- 
 sake-you. 8 He-has-no knowledge that will help us in- 
 this-case. 9. He-will sell his potatoes in-the-city. 75 10 I- 
 will receive many-times as-much for-my poem as James 
 will for his. 1 1 Is-he-coming and-how-many will he-take ? 
 
 12 They 100 should-think of all things before they-leave. 
 
 13 I-suppose he-will-never go. 14 They pay a-low rate 
 for coal. 15 You ought to-go 125 and-take-your lesson in- 
 this subject. 16 I-will-inform them of-the-rate. 139 
 
 LESSON XL 
 
 SHORT VOWELS. 
 
 1. The short vowels are represented by light dots and 
 dashes in the same positions as the long vowels. They 
 are as follows : i as in sit, first place dot ; e as in net, second 
 place dot; a as in sat, third place dot; o as in lot, first 
 place dash; u as in cut, second place dash; oo as in look, 
 third place dash. 
 
 2. The following illustrations show the use of the short . 
 vowels : 
 
 pick ill sit egg beg edge map ak rock 
 
 hug look rook 
 
 3. \Yith one exception, the rules for placing the short 
 vowels beside the strokes, when occurring between two 
 
42 PITMANIC 
 
 consonants, are exactly the same as those for the long 
 vowels. 
 
 4. The exception is in the rule governing second place 
 short vowels when used. A second place short vowel, 
 when written between two strokes, is put beside and before 
 the second consonant. The following is a summary of 
 the rules for placing both long and short vowels when 
 used between two consonant strokes : 
 
 (1) All first place vowels, long or short, and second 
 place long vowels are written beside the first consonant. 
 
 (2) All third place vowels, long or short, and second 
 place short vowels are written beside the second consonant. 
 
 5. When two separately pronounced vowels are to be 
 written between two consonants, as in Lewis, the vowel oc- 
 curring first in the word is written near the stroke, beside 
 which it would be placed, if it were the only vowel occurring 
 between the two consonants, and the second vowel is written 
 beside and slightly removed from the consonant beside 
 which it would be placed, if it were the only vowel between 
 the two consonants. When two separately pronounced 
 vowels are to be written either before or after a single con- 
 sonant, as in iota or Leo, the vowel occurring first when 
 the two occur before the stroke, is written slightly removed 
 from it and the one coming next is placed near the stroke. 
 When the two vowels follow, the one coming first is written 
 near the stroke and the second is removed slightly from it. 
 
 EXERCISE ii. 
 
 Using both long and short vowels write the folowing 
 words : 
 
 6. List Words. (41 i :3o.) 
 
 i marrow, 2 sell, 3 mob, 4 lap, 5 essay, 6 lip, 7 pony, 
 8 funny, 9 Leon, 10 dairy, u big, 12 putty, 13 lazy, 14 bag, 
 
SHORTHAND 43 
 
 15 dig, 1 6 rug, 17 tare, 18 petty, 19 dare, 20 tick, 21 pitch, 
 22 catch, 23 egg, 24 edge, 25 smudge, 26 budge, 27 engage, 
 28 dumb, 29 allay, 30 fellow, 31 pith, 32 ledge, 33 look, 
 34 rock, 35 lock, 36 tuck, 37 knock, 38 nook, 39 smack, 
 40 rack. 41 deck. 
 
 Wordsigns. 
 
 f 
 
 A. 'M. advertising common dollar ever give hear 
 advertisement given here 
 
 advertise-d, had her 
 
 y 
 
 iarge 
 
 \ 
 
 must-be 
 
 now 
 
 P. 
 
 M. 
 
 watch 
 
 income 
 
 forthwith 
 
 nothii 
 
 8. Phrases. (45 :4o.) 
 
 i An-edge, 2 will-engage-him, 3 however-much, 4 in-the- 
 cage, 5 will-sell-it, 6 a-funny-sight, 7 a-tame-goose, 8 a- 
 large-egg, 9 on-the-ledge, 23 10 a-pretty-case, n in-the-rack, 
 12 a-large-rock, 13 you-will-know, 14 you-may-go, 15 that- 
 must-be, 16 go-forthwith. 4 '"' 
 
 9. Sentences. (147 2:25.) 
 
 i James may-leave for-the-city on the-fourth of July. 
 2 You-should take-advantage of-his-knowledge. 3 They 
 have oats and-hay for sale.- 5 4 Come here before two p. 
 m. and-take all-your-money. 5 Study-the English lan- 
 guage thoroughly and-you-will succeed in-this subject. 
 6 Thomas Adams'"' will-take the-carriage and-heavy-team 
 for-two-weeks. 7 I-think-that yon-must-be going to take 
 all-your oats to the-depot. 75 8 Will any-of the-officers take- 
 advantage of the-error? 9 Nothing was-said of the-change 
 of-time for his office duties. 10 They make many 100 heavy 
 carriages for sale, n Take away your desks Tuesday for 
 I-shall occupy all-the-room. 1-2 That was a-common-thing 
 
44 PITMANIC 
 
 for Ezra to-go 125 away and-stay a-day or two. 13 He-never 
 says before he-goes that-he-will stay away for so-many 
 days. 147 
 
 10. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XU. 
 
 DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 1. In addition to the simple vowels already explained, 
 we have the following diphthongs : 
 
 2. Oi, as in toil ; wi, as in wife, written in the first posi- 
 tion ; and ow as in vow, written in the third position. Long 
 i is treated as a diphthong and is represented by a character 
 like the wordsign for the pronoun I. It takes the first posi- 
 tion. The diphthongs are illustrated as follows: 
 
 V. "] t f ") 
 
 boll oil boy wife wide twice tile Ice endow 
 
 c 7 
 
 'M 
 
 fowl idea wipe wire invoice envoy row joy cow cowl 
 
SHORTHAND 45 
 
 3. When any of the first place diphthongs precedes 
 the first consonant in an outline and forms an angle with 
 it, or the third place diphthong follows and forms an angle 
 with the last consonant in an outline, it should be joined, 
 as shown in the illustrations above. In no other case should 
 the diphthongs ever be joined. 
 
 4. The rules governing the long and short vowels when 
 used between two consonant strokes apply to the diphthongs 
 given in this lesson when they occur between two strokes. 
 
 5. The student should write and re-write many times 
 the words given in this and the preceding lesson, inserting 
 the vowels and diphthongs, wherever they occur, in each 
 outline, until thoroughly familiar with their use. 
 
 6. The diphthongs, like the simple vowels, are seldom 
 inserted in actual reporting. It is, however, important that 
 they be thoroughly committed to memory in order that, in 
 the few cases where it is advisable to write them, they may 
 be inserted readily. The fact that a character is seldom 
 used in actual reporting is apt to lead the student to slight 
 it. He should, rather, give it especial attention. If he does 
 not do so, he is certain to be unable to recall it readily when 
 he has urgent need to use it quickly. 
 
 EXERCISE 12. 
 
 Using the diphthongs write the following words: 
 
 7. List Words. (40 1 115.) fa 
 
 i Pipe, 2 pike, 3 dime, -"4 chime, 5 rhyme, 6 boy, 7 toy, 
 8 coy, 9 alloy, 10 boil, n coil, 12 tile, 13 guile, 14 mile, 
 15 soil, 1 6 revile, 17 loyal, 18 row, 19 vow, 20 cow, 21 envoy, 
 22 fowl, 23 thigh, 24 dire, 25 hie, 26 towel, 27 wipe, 28 wide, 
 29 wife, 30 wire, 31 dye, 32 pile, 33 toil, 34 cowl, 35 royal, 
 36 invoice, 37 joy, 38 voyage, 39 vouch, 40 type. 
 
4 6 * PITMANIC 
 
 8. Wordsigns. 
 
 we were what would hath as-well-as mistake wish Ohio 
 
 with thank 
 
 youth 
 
 9. Phrases. (67 1 105.) 
 
 i That-dike, 2 an-envoy, 3 a-towel, 4 make-them, 5 I- 
 may-go, 6 I-have-enough, 7 you-enjoy, 8 you-will-endow, 
 9 take-the-cow, 10 he-may-come, 25 n you-revile-him, 12 and- 
 say-you-will, 13 I-see-how, 14 on-the-pike, 15 hear-the- 
 chime, 16 he-will-die, 17 take-a-cake, 18 a-heavy-invoice, 5Ct 
 19 a- funny- fellow, 20 what-do-you-like, 21 a-heavy-stock. 
 22 will-you-come-up, 23 he-goes-away. 67 
 
 10. Sentences. (186 3:00.) 
 
 I Both the-ladies will-take several cakes with-them on 
 Saturday. 2 They both think that two-hours' study a-day 
 is enough for-this subject. 25 3 In-this they-make a-mistake 
 for-all should-give several hours a-day to-this study. 
 4 They both go to Duluth, Minnesota, and-will 50 engage 
 in-business in-that large city. 5 Take-time enough to-day 
 and-never-leave a-thing for tomorrow which-it-is your duty 
 to-do 75 to-day. 6 He-always-goes on Saturdays to-the-city 
 for some oat-meal and-eggs to-eat. 7 The-electric road 
 may-reach-here in-four 100 months and-all will take-a-ride 
 to-the-city. 8 Should you-sell your cow you-will have to 
 go for-milk to Joseph Thompson's 125 dairy and-pay a-high 
 rate. 9 Your-son James will take both the-pail and- jug to 
 the-depot and-will hurry home. 10 Any-boy 150 who- will- 
 stick to-his-task faithfully will succeed in-his-business in- 
 time, ii You-may take-them a-case of herring to-day 
 12 Have same 175 come on the-electric road as-the-rate is 
 much lower. lss 
 
SHORTHAND 47 
 
 ii. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XIII. 
 
 CONSONANT POSITION. 
 
 1. As has been explained before, the vowels are very 
 seldom inserted in actual reporting. Usually the consonant 
 outline and the context are all that are required to secure 
 legibility. However, constructions sometimes occur where, 
 in addition to the outline and context, the accented vowel 
 is necessary in order to obtain the exact meaning. To 
 actually insert this vowel would often require too much 
 time. In such cases, where legibility makes it necessary 
 that the accented vowel be known, it is seldom necessary 
 to actually insert it. By the use of what is called consonant 
 position, the accented vowel may be indicated, thus saving 
 the time which would be required to insert it. 
 
 2. There are three positions for consonant outlines: 
 
48 PITMANIC 
 
 i, above; 2, on; and 3, through or below the line. These 
 correspond to the three vowel positions. By means of 
 these three positions it is possible to indicate whether the 
 accented vowel in a word is first, second or third place. 
 
 3. In reference to position, outlines are divided into two 
 classes. 
 
 (1) Those which contain one or more upright letters. 
 These are called upright outlines. 
 
 (2) Those in which all the strokes are horizontal. These 
 are called horizontal outlines. 
 
 4. An upright outline is in the first position when the 
 first upright letter rests one-half the length of te above the 
 line upon which the writing is being done. Horizontal 
 outlines in the first position are placed the full length of 
 te above the line. An upright outline is in the second 
 position when its first upright letter rests on the line. Hor- 
 izontal outlines in the second position are just above the 
 line. An upright outline is in the third position when its 
 first upright letter rests one-half a space below the line. 
 Horizontal outlines in the third position are immediately 
 below the line. 
 
 5. The purpose of position is to enable the reporter to 
 indicate the principal or accented vowel in a word in the 
 cases where it is necessary to know what the accented vowel 
 is, thus saving the time it would take to insert it. If a 
 word is used in such a connection that it is necessary to 
 show what its principal vowel is in order to make it clear, 
 it may be done more quickly by the use of position than by 
 actually inserting the vowel. 
 
 6. If the accented vowel is first, second or third place, 
 it may be indicated by writing the outline in the first, sec- 
 ond or third consonant position. Thus the sentence, He 
 was living on the farm, might, when written in Shorthand, 
 
SHORTHAND 49 
 
 be translated. He was levying on the farm. Such danger 
 of ambiguity would readily be overcome by writing the out- 
 line for living, the accented vowel of which is first place, 
 if that were the w T ord desired, in the first position. They 
 are taking too much, and They are talking too much, 
 would be another case where ambiguity might result. All 
 danger would be avoided by placing the outline for the 
 word talking, the accented vowel of which is first place, in 
 the first position, if the sentence with that word were used. 
 7. Examples of first and third position outlines : 
 
 miring meekness museum apology pealing falsity fealty 
 
 \ \ 
 
 V vg^ o 
 
 ^ 
 
 ' v 
 
 purity nuisance abuse absence mooring refuse foolish boorish 
 
 8. The scheme of position is used to save the time which 
 would otherwise be required for the insertion of accented 
 vowels where necessary to avoid ambiguity. This is likely 
 to occur only when one of the following conditions exists : 
 
 ( i ) Where an outline is the same for two different 
 words, either of which would make sense where that outline 
 is used. 
 
 (2) When some unusual word is used. 
 
 (3) When a common w r ord is used in an unusual 
 manner. 
 
 Just where these conditions would lead to ambiguity by 
 writing, in the second position, outlines for words with first 
 or third position accented vow r els, is a question each one must 
 settle for himself. Even in the illustrations given above, 
 what precedes would in most cases make it perfectly clear 
 whether lay-ve-ing meant living or levying, or whether 
 
50 PITMANIC 
 
 te-kay-ing meant taking or talking. Consequently the fol-. 
 lowing general rule only can be given : 
 
 If it is evident that a word with either a first or third 
 place accented vowel, would in some particular connection 
 be ambiguous if written on the line, it should be written in 
 the position of its accented vowel. 
 
 9. Stenographers will find, as they write more and more, 
 they will need to make less and less use of consonant posi- 
 tion, or the actual insertion of vowels. 
 
 10. Outlines for single syllable words are always the 
 most difficult to read because of the fact that they contain 
 but few consonants. It is coming to be the custom, there- 
 fore, with many writers to give outlines for such words the 
 position of their vowel. This is an excellent rule to follow. 
 When outlines are actually vocalized there is no occasion 
 to write them other than in the second position. 
 
 11. With wordsigns the rule is always to give them" the 
 position shown in the text when they are written alone or 
 when they begin a phrase. 
 
 EXERCISE 13. 
 
 The following list contains a few of the words which the 
 reporter will find it necessary most frequently to place in 
 position. These words, however, need not in ordinary use 
 be given the position of the accented vowel. This is neces- 
 sary only when they are used in some connection where it 
 is evident that the accented vowel should be indicated. They 
 are given here to be written in position merely to give the 
 student practice in position writing. 
 
 12. List Words. (52 1 120.) 
 
 i Occupy, 2 abide, 3 joyous, 4 deity, 5 assign, 6 talking, 
 7 lively, 8 icy, 9 meekness, 10 boiling, n ally, 12 sighing, 
 13 living, 14 filing, 15 enjoy, 16 seating, 17 unseat, 18 easily, 
 
SHORTHAND 51 
 
 19 rocking, 20 ticking, 21 bower, 22 untie, 23 poising, 
 24 July, 25 tally, 26 allow, 27 folly, 28 envoy, 29 invoice, 
 30 incite, 31 elegy, 32 issue, 33 incense, 34 music, 35 entomb, 
 36 endow} 37 endue, 38 tower, 39 power, 40 imbue, 41 ca- 
 rouse, 42 espouse, 43 atom, 44 museum, 45 unloose, 46 hon- 
 esty, 47 sightly, 48 aloud, 49 aloof, 50 poorly, 51 nuisance, 
 52 unseen. 
 
 13. Wordsigns. 
 
 / U- t 
 
 acquit because be- catho- etc. continue domestic disadvantage 
 acute yond lie 
 
 Decem- expect ex- en- Europe false- failure hope howsoever 
 ber expected change large hood happy 
 
 V 
 
 holy holiness happiness highly highway hence height higher company 
 
 Iowa 
 
 14. Phrases. (64 i :oo.) 
 
 i I-will, 2 he-is, 3 my-life, 4 is-he, 5 he-said, 6 due-you, 
 7 by-that, 8 by-which-many, 9. by-doing-so, 10 a-poor- 
 reason, n give-me, 25 12 give-his, 13 keep-cool, 14 if-they, 
 15 I-like, 16 I- feel-nothing, 17 I-have-nothing, 18 it-is- 
 long, 19 due-many-months, 20 will-you-come, 21 you-come, 50 
 22 he-may-go-up, 23 as-that-is, 24 has-he-come-back, 25 will- 
 take-him. 64 
 
 15. Sentences. (214 3:30.) 
 
 i If-you-will come-back he-will give-up all-your books 
 ancl-money. 2 I-think I-will come-back in December and-I- 
 may- r> come in November. 3 The- jury will acquit-him. 
 
52 PITMANIC 
 
 4 Because of-the-loss he-will never come-back. 5 He-goes- 
 to Europe in-company with-his 50 cousin who-lives beyond 
 the-lake. 6 I-expect to exchange my house or enlarge it 
 in-the-summer. 7 She-is a-domestic at Ezra Thompson's. 75 
 8 He-is-at a-di sad vantage so he- will soon leave with a-new- 
 company. 9 He-will make a-failure if-he stays in-the-city. 100 
 10 Hence I-think he-would-be much happier, if-he-would- 
 make a-change. n The-chimney is so high it-may fall. 
 
 12 You-will-have 125 much happiness in-your new-home. 
 
 13 Howsoever much-you may wish to-do so you-should 
 ne~ver give-your cousin cause to feel that-he 150 has-to look 
 to-you for a-living. 14 You-should look him right in the- 
 eye and-say to-him that-you deny the- falsehood. 175 15 I- 
 think you- will all make a-failure if-you give but four hours 
 to the-study each day. 16 Ship to-me to-day eight 200 
 reams of fair stock for my office and-six reams for our 
 new factory. 214 
 
 1 6. Translation. 
 
SHORTHAND 53 
 
 LESSON XIV. 
 
 THE SEZ-CIRCLE. 
 
 1. The consonant sounds of es and ze, or some combina- 
 tion of these two sounds, frequently occur in succession in 
 a word. When these two consonants so occur they are 
 represented by what is called the sez-circle. This is a circle 
 made several times larger than the s-circle. The sez-circle 
 is written upon the same side of strokes as the s-circle. 
 
 2. It is not necessary that the sounds represented by 
 this circle be in the same syllable. In the majority of cases, 
 this large circle which stands for es-es, es-ze, ze-es or 
 ze-ze, has the first sound of this combination at the end of 
 one syllable and the second at the beginning of the following 
 syllable. Care should be taken to make the sez-circle suffi- 
 ciently large that there may be no danger of mistaking it for 
 the s-circle. 
 
 3. When a sez-circle is followed by the sound of es or 
 ze it is represented by an s-circle written within the sez- 
 circle as in exercises. 
 
 4. The use of the sez-circle is illustrated in the follow- 
 ing words : 
 
 -0 ? V lo -. 
 
 cases races bases Texas system recess Moses empha- sus- exercises 
 
 slz-e plcious 
 
 EXERCISE 14. 
 
 Write the following words making use of the sez-circle: 
 5. List Words. (401 :io.) 
 
 i Texas, 2 races, 3 faces, 4 doses, 5 houses, 6 molasses, 
 7 bases, 8 loses, 9 success, 10 nuisances, n exercise, 12 boss- 
 
54 
 
 PITMANIC 
 
 es, 13 system, 14 fences, 15 lances, 16 chases, 17 vases, 
 1 8 invoices, 19 causes, 20 accessory, 21 masses, 22 emphasis, 
 23 kisses, 24 laces, 25 noses, 26 pieces, 27 roses, 28 exist, 
 29 suspicious, 30 maces, 31 necessary, 32 access, 33 amuses, 
 34 resist, 35 rises, 36 hisses, 37 subsist, 38 desist, 39 neces- 
 sity, 40 refuses. 
 
 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 (o 
 
 A* Lo 
 
 c 
 
 this-is eives-us is-such is-said 
 
 lovee-us takes-us as-soon-as is-as, Is 
 his, his- 
 has, hls-ls 
 
 as-is is-seen 
 
 influence 
 
 signify insignifl- idea lawyer 
 
 mostly 
 
 as-has 
 
 
 signature cant 
 
 may-as- 
 
 has-his 
 
 
 significant 
 
 well 
 
 bas-as 
 
 
 
 
 -V 
 
 \ 
 
 W~^ i 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 V- 
 
 
 neverthe- 
 
 postofflce 
 
 postmark half thls-eyetem 
 
 
 less 
 
 
 
 
 7. Phrases. (75 1:15.) 
 
 i He-leases, 2 you-may-exist, 3 my-fuses, 4 it-is-neces- 
 sary, 5 many-successes, 6 your-successor, 7 they-subsist, 
 8 I-may-desist, 9 a-necessity, 10 I-insist, II my-exercises, 25 
 12 are-suspicious, 13 our-exercises, 14 took-the-axis, 15 pick- 
 the-roses, 16 took-an-excess, 17 you-are-suspicious, 18 have- 
 much-success, 19 take-some-laces, 20 you- will-desist, 50 21 he- 
 exists, 22 he-will-desist, 23 will-take-the-masses, 24 he-gives- 
 us, 25 this-is-time, 26 this-system-goes, 27 is-such-a-thing, 
 28 has-his-come. 73 
 
 8. Sentences. (175 2:50.) 
 
 i Those faces are-familiar to me. 2 His influence on^ 
 this-system is-such that-you-will have to-acknowledge it. 
 
SHORTHAND 55 
 
 3 I-will go-back-to 25 the-depot and-take the-lawyer's cases 
 to the-postoffice in-time for the-mail. 4 It-is-said that-he- 
 \\ ill go-to Iowa this 50 fall and-stay for six weeks. 5 He-may- 
 as-well come-back, nevertheless, for-all of-his influence will- 
 avail nothing. 6 It-is 75 significant that-his ideas on-post- 
 office affairs are always wrong, notwithstanding his long 
 and-thorough study of-that business. 7 He-loves-us 100 
 though we-do-make many mistakes in-our easy lessons. 
 8 As-soon-as you take up the-study of the-new oil business 
 I-will 125 help-you by taking some stock in-it and-by giving- 
 you all the-advice which-you-may desire. 9 The-youth will- 
 make a-success 150 of-his study of-this-system of book-keep- 
 ing as-soon-as you give-him a-job to-help with the-books 
 in-your office. 175 
 
 g. Translation. 
 
 -/- o_c ._ . 1 ^L^.^^^-^^r^^-^ 
 -.< y V ^vVL^_lLJLl 
 
 A r\-7-H T,\ > 
 
 ' 
 
 ^ 
 
 h / 
 
5 6 PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON XV. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 i. QUESTIONS : 
 
 (1) How are the short vowel signs distinguished 
 from the long vowels? 
 
 (2) When a short first place vowel is written between 
 two consonant strokes, beside which must it be placed ? 
 
 (3) When a short second place vowel is written be- 
 tween two strokes beside which must it be written? 
 
 (4) When a short third place vowel is written be- 
 tween two strokes where must it be placed? 
 
 (5) How do these rules differ from those given for 
 placing the long vowels between two consonant strokes? 
 
 (6) When two separately sounded vowels must be 
 written between two consonant strokes where must each 
 of them be placed? Give example. 
 
 (7) What is the rule when two separately pronounced 
 vowels must be written beside a single consonant? Give 
 example. 
 
 (8) Name the diphthongs given in the lesson on 
 diphthongs. 
 
 (9) Give position of each. 
 
 ( 10) May these diphthongs ever be joined to the 
 strokes before or after which they occur? 
 
 (n) If so, give an example of each diphthong so 
 placed. 
 
 (12) What is the rule for placing diphthongs beside 
 the consonants when occurring between two consonant 
 strokes ? 
 
 (13) How may vowels sometimes be indicated, thus 
 
SHORTHAND 57 
 
 making it unnecessary to write them? 
 
 (14) How many consonant positions are there? 
 
 (15) Name them, 
 
 ( 16) Where is an upright outline written when placed 
 in the first position? 
 
 (17) When in the Second position? 
 
 ( 18) When in the third position ? 
 
 (19) Are horizontal outlines when in the first or 
 third position written the same distance from the line as 
 upright outlines? 
 
 (20) What is the purpose of position? 
 
 (21) W T hat vowel in a word is indicated by the con- 
 sonant position of the outline? 
 
 (22) Does the reporter use position more, of less, as 
 he becomes more experienced as a stenographer? 
 
 (23) What is the invariable rule in reference to posi- 
 tion in writing Wordsigns? 
 
 (24) What does the sez-circle represent? 
 
 C (25) How much larger than the s-circle is the sez- 
 circle? 
 
 (26) Is it ever permissible to use the sez-circle to 
 represent two sounds of es or ze in two different syllables? 
 
 (27) On which side of the stroke to which it is joined 
 should the sez-circle be written? 
 
 EXERCISE 15. 
 2. List Words. (43 -.55.) 
 
 Essay Leon putty pitch edge smudge engage allay pith 
 smack pipe dime rhyme alloy revile loyal envoy occupy 
 joyous assume enjoy folly allow carouse espouse 25 aloud 
 Texas races doses houses molasses success nuisances exercise 
 accessory masses emphasis pieces suspicious amuses chases 
 desist refuses. 43 
 
58 PITMANlfc 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 A. M., advertise, (advertised, advertisement, advertising, 
 had,) common, dollar, ever, give, (given,) hear, (here, her,) 
 however, large, must-be, now, P. M., watch, income, forth- 
 with, nothing, we, (with,) were, what, would, hath, (thank, 
 youth,) as-well-as, mistake, wish, Ohio, acquit, (acute,) 
 because, beyond, catholic, etc., continue, domestic, disad- 
 vantage, December, expect, (expected,) exchange, enlarge, 
 Europe, falsehood, failure, hope, (happy,) howsoever, holy, 
 holiness, happiness, highly, highway, (Iowa,) hence, height, 
 higher, company, this-is, gives-us, is-such, is-said, loves-us, 
 takes-us, as-soon-as, is-as, (is-his, his-has, his-is,) as-is, 
 (as-has, has-his, has-as,) is-seen, influence, signify, (signa- 
 ture, significant,) insignificant, idea, lawyer, mostly, (may- 
 as-well,) nevertheless, postoffice, postmark, half, this-sys- 
 tem. 
 
 4. Phrases. (75 i :is.) 
 
 i Will-sell-it, 2 a-large-egg, 3 you-may-go, 4 that-must- 
 be, 5 an-envoy, 6 they-may-go, 7 I-have-enough, 8 you-en- 
 joy, 9 he-may-come, 25 10 I-see-how, n he-will-die, 12, a- 
 heavy-stock, 13 he-goes-away, 14 he-is, 15 he-said, 16 by- 
 that, 17 a-poor-reason, 18 give-me, 19 if-they, GO 20 I-have- 
 nothing, 21 you-came, 22 as-that-is, 23 will-take-him, 24 he- 
 leases, 25 it-is-necessary, 26 I-insist, 27 took-an-excess, 28 is- 
 such-a-thing. 75 
 
 5. Sentences. (177 3:00.) 
 
 i James may-leave for-the-city on the-fourth of July. 
 2 You-should take-advantage of-his-knowledge. 3 Will 
 any-of the-officers take-advantage 25 of the-error? 4 They 
 make many heavy carriages for sale. 5 Any-boy who-will- 
 stick to-his task faithfully will succeed in-his-business in 50 
 due time. 6 You-may take-them a-case of herring to-day. 
 7 Have same come on the-electric road as-the-rate is much 
 
SHORTHAND 59 
 
 lower. 7 "' 8 Hence I-think he-would-be much happier if-he- 
 would-make a-change. 9 The-chimney is so high it-may 
 fall. 10 Howsoever much-yon 100 may wish to-do so you- 
 shoukl never make-your cousin feel that-he has-to look to- 
 yon for a-living. 1 1 It-is significant 1 -"' that all-his ideas on- 
 postoffice affairs are always wrong, notwithstanding his 
 long and-thorough study of -that business. 12 As-soon-as 
 you take up 1 '"'" the-stucly of the-new oil business I-will help- 
 yon by taking some stock in-it and-giving-you all the-advice 
 \vhich-you 17r< may desire. 177 
 
 - 
 
 LESSON XVI. 
 THE KMP SIGN. 
 
 1. When p or b follows and is in the same syllable with 
 an m, it is not written, but is indicated by shading em. Em 
 thus shaded is called emp. 
 
 2. Emp is used to indicate a p or b in a following sylla- 
 ble when the two syllables are sounded closely together, as 
 in embark. The use of emp to indicate a p of b in a fol- 
 lowing syllable is permissible only in words where the p 
 or b coalesces more closely with the preceding em than 
 with the following consonant. This is usually the case 
 where an m ends one syllable and the following begins with 
 a p or b. 
 
 In imply, for example, emp would not be used for the 
 reason that the p, although beginning the syllable following 
 the one ending in m, coalesces more closely with the follow- 
 ing 1 than with the preceding m. 
 
 3. The use of emp is shown by the following illustra- 
 tions ; 
 
60 PITMANIC 
 
 7 
 
 dump lump campaign amply symbol rump jnmp champing embark 
 
 EXERCISE 16. 
 
 Write the following words using emp: 
 
 4. List Words. (33 145.) 
 
 i Bump, 2 amply, 3 jump, 4 camp, 5 damp, 6 ambitious, 
 7 temple, 8 campaign, 9 thump, 10 gimp, u romp, 12 dump, 
 13 tumble, 14 pomp, 15 ambiguous, 16 lump, 17 embezzle. 
 1 8 fumble, 19 sympathy, 20 gamble, 21 ample, 22 encamp, 
 23 pimple, 24 camping, 25 thumping, 26 jumping, 27 dump- 
 ing. 28 limp, 29 pumping, 30 champ, 31 embellish, 32 im- 
 becile, 33 scamp. 
 
 5. Too often students neglect to give the exercises suffi- 
 cent practice to enable them to write the outlines legibly 
 and readily within the given time. The student will obtain 
 the best results if he will not leave an exercise until he is 
 able to write it easily within the required time. He should 
 also make it a point to read each exercise every time he 
 writes it, and oftener, if necessary, to enable him to read it 
 easily in the time that it takes to write it. Be sure that 
 you know how to write the correct outline for each word 
 in an exercise and then keep at it until the prescribed time 
 is reached. 
 
 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 similar 
 v 4 
 
 similarity speak yourself impossible 
 speech 
 
 improve-d United 
 Improvement States 
 may-be 
 
 ' U 
 
 unite 
 unity 
 
 uniform quick square simple 
 simply 
 
 temperate important 
 temperance Importance 
 
 temperament 
 
SHORTHAND 61 
 
 7. Phrases. (40 :35-) 
 
 i Similar-cases, 2 some-similar-things, 3 much-similarity, 
 
 4 I-spoke, 5 a-speech, 6 a-$ignificant, 7 saw-the-savior, 
 8 sought-the-savior, 9 the-message-came, 10 a-simple-thing, 2S 
 
 ii a-square-case, 12 temperate-day, 13 will-unite-them,, 
 \4 uniform-reasons, 15 may-unite, 16 will-be-temperate. 40 
 
 8. Sentences. (230 3 :45-) 
 
 i They sell oats and-hay in-the-camp of-the-army. 
 2 They dump the-coal at the-depot for the-mill of the-new 
 company. 2 '"' 3 The-two armies are soon to unite and-will 
 quickly rout the-enemy arid-take the-city. 4 If-they suc- 
 ceed, such an-important victory will 50 So reduce the-enemy's 
 forces that I-think they may soon leave the-vicinity* 
 
 5 James Morrison, of Iowa, will go to Missouri in January 
 or 7 "' February and-will-take all of-his stock along if-the- 
 roads are such as-to allow him to-do so. 6 Take your oats 
 to 100 the-mill at the-depot and-leave-them for Thomas Mills 
 \vho-will pay-you for-them on the-fourth day of May and- 
 will 125 give-you a-fair rate for-them. 7 If-you-will take-my 
 advice and-do-this I-know you-will help all-those who-are 150 
 in-the-business with-you as-well-as receive a-fair income 
 for-yourself on-such a-deal. 8 He took the-logs to the- 
 company's 17 "' ships. 9 All the-ships will now go to Chicago, 
 Illinois, to the-immense saw-mills of-that-city. 10 The-new- 
 company will buy up all 200 the-tallow in Massachusetts, Illi- 
 nois, Minnesota and Iowa and-raise the-rate as-soon-as they 
 receive all the-stock so that retail dealers will 225 have to 
 buy of-them. 230 
 
62 PITMANIC 
 
 9. Translation. 
 
 -/-Lv 
 
 LESSON XVII. 
 
 COALESCKNTS. 
 
 1. Way and yea in certain combinations do not form 
 distinct angles. It has been deemed desirable in such 
 cases to use different signs for these letters. The signs 
 made use of represent the way or yea and also the follow- 
 ing vowel which usually closely coalesces with the preceding 
 way or yea. 
 
 2. These signs are called coalescents. They consist of 
 half circles the size of the s-circle. They are shaded when 
 used for a y or w with a following long vowel and not 
 shaded when combined with a following short vowel. To 
 represent a w and a following vowel the right and left 
 halves are used, the left half for w and dot vowels and the 
 right half for w and dash vowels. To represent y and a 
 following vowel the upper and lower halves are used, the 
 lower half for y and a dot vowel, and the upper half for 
 y and a dash vowel. 
 
SHORTHAND 63 
 
 3. The coalescents are treated as vowels, bein^ placed 
 beside the consonant strokes and given the first, second and 
 third vowel positions according as the coalescing vowel is 
 first, second or third place. The y coalescents always curve 
 either up or down, and the w coalescents curve to the 
 right or left ; none of them varying to correspond with the 
 slant of any strokes, as the dash vowels do. 
 
 4. When a coalescent is written between two consonant 
 strokes it follows the same rule which would govern its 
 long or short vowel, were the simple vowel written. 
 
 5. Ine fact that the coalescents are so seldom used 
 makes it all the more necessary that they should be thor- 
 oughly memorized. Unless they are, the characters will 
 soon be forgotten. 
 
 6. 1 he student will be enabled to recall the coalescent 
 signs more readily by remembering that the wordsign you 
 is the y with the dash vowel oo, hence all coalescents of y 
 and dash vowels bow up. Therefore y with the dot vowels 
 must necessarily bow down. Likewise the wordsign we 
 is the w with the long e. As this bows to the left, all 
 coalescents of w and dot vowels bow in that direction, and 
 conversely all coalescents of w and a dash vowel bow to the 
 right. 
 
 7. While many of the following words are not written 
 with the coalescents always inserted, they illustrate the 
 sounds represented by the coalescents and the manner in 
 which these characters are made as well as the position in 
 which they are written when used. 
 
 Y With Vowels. 
 
 -Y~ r i ^ -*_ 
 
 yearly Yale yacht yawn yoke yule 
 
64 PITMANIC 
 
 Yeddo yam yon young 
 
 W With Vowels. 
 
 1 -I J 
 
 ed wade wa-d walk wore womb 
 
 ? '/ -. f ^ J 
 
 wit wedge wag wot won wood 
 
 8. The coalescents which would naturally appear in the 
 places represented by stars in the above list are not used 
 for the reason that there are no words in the language in 
 which these particular combinations of y and short i or 
 short oo occur. 
 
 9. When a first place coalescent precedes the first con- 
 sonant stroke in an outline and makes an angle with it. 
 or a third place coalescent follows the last consonant and 
 forms an angle with it, it may be joined to the consonant 
 stroke, thus: 
 
 IV 2 M 
 
 __ I _ V- _ ' -1 _ 1 __ I - *\ x^"\A __ , 
 
 widow weave walk ague wot wit que mew 
 
 10. It will now appear from whence the signs for such 
 words as year, yet, you, we, with, what, beyond, etc., are 
 derived. 
 
 11. The important question for the beginner is: When 
 shall he use the coalescent signs representing the con- 
 sonants y or w and the coalescing vowels, or instead of 
 these signs, when shall he use the consonant strokes yea 
 or way and omit the vowels as all vowels are usually omit- 
 
SHORTHAND 65 
 
 ted ? The rule is ; whenever the stroke yea or way makes 
 a distinct and easily formed junction with what precedes 
 or follows, it should be used. In other cases the coales- 
 cents must be written, if they are necessary to make the 
 meaning of the outline clear. It frequently happens that 
 the coalescents may be omitted just as simple vowels are 
 omitted and no ambiguity result. In such cases it is use- 
 less to insert them. They are very rarely used since it is 
 but seldom that the stroke yea and way cannot be made 
 use of. 
 
 Using the coalescents write the folowing words : 
 
 EXERCISE 17. 
 
 12. List Words. (27 i :oo.) 
 
 i Yacht, 2 weave, 3 wit, 4 witch. 5 duel, 6 weed, 7 cue, 
 8 Cube 9 widow, 10 hew, n Jew, 12 Dubuque, 13 Buel. 
 14 pew, 15 fuel, 1 6 beauty, 17 wage, 18 wedge, 19 wed, 
 20 wad, 21 wet, 22 wot, 23 few, 24 wood, 25 chew, 26 dew, 
 27 stew. 
 
 13. Wordsigns. 
 
 ; r I . ^ 1 N ^ 
 
 whose whole witness why white to-be to-become 
 use wholly 
 
 t 
 
 ^ J / 
 
 <i S~\ / 
 
 ' s~ 
 
 testimony junior 
 
 N> 
 
 senior justice-of- yet 
 the-peace 
 
 I 
 
 salvation 
 
 14. Phrases. (45 :4o.) 
 
 i Whose-came. 2 the-whole-day, 3 a-year-ago, 4 a-new- 
 witness, 5 it-may-be-wrong, 6 to-become-famous, 7 in-his- 
 testimony, 8 it-may-be-important, 23 9 an-important-case, 
 10 will-take-them. n the-senior-came, 12 was-a-witness, 
 13 will-take-his-testimony, 14 and-take, 15 your-money. 45 
 
 
66 PITMANIC 
 
 15. Sentences. (258 4:15.) 
 
 i He-is-too young to take up the-study of the-testimony 
 in-such an-important-case. 2 He-ought to-become efficient 
 in-this subject 25 if-he-keeps on for-a-whole year. 3 It-may- 
 be that both will come as witnesses in-such an-important- 
 case if the-lawyers 50 will pay the-fare for both of-them. 
 
 4 The- junior justice-of-the-peace will hear all the-witnesses 
 in-the-case and-will review 75 the-testimony with-his senior 
 before deciding to-which asylum the-insane youth shall-go. 
 
 5 They go to the-city by-way-of the-avenue 100 along the- 
 lake because it-is usually in-fair shape for heavy teams. 
 
 6 It-was muddy all-day Saturday and Sunday but on Tues- 
 day it 123 became so dusty that it- was injurious to our eyes. 
 
 7 It-is- wholly insufficient and-will have-to-go back to the- 
 depot to-day 150 so that-they may ship it tomorrow. 8 They 
 wish to-receive the-bureau at-the-same time the-team takes 
 all the-smaller things which 175 they expect to use in the-new 
 house. 9 What-do-you think has become of all-the-money 
 and-why do-the-police give-up 200 the-search for the-thieves? 
 10 The-side- walks on-this side of the-city are so-poor that 
 before we-know-it somebody .will receive 225 an-injury and- 
 sue the-city for heavy damages. 1 1 The-packages came to 
 the-factory in Toledo by-way-of Cincinnati, Ohio, and-will 
 give 250 the-company enough to-do for-several weeks. 258 
 
SHORTHAND 67 
 
 1 6. Translation. 
 
 I - -*<-) VM^--^' 
 
 v_ / /lA- / " 
 
 l 1 ^ ) 
 
 / \' f 
 
 O.V. vL,.-.f-^ 
 
 / 
 .^/U-. 
 
 .j -\ \ 
 
 _>v \ 
 
 LESSON XVIII. 
 
 THE L-HOOK. 
 
 1. When pe, be, te, de, chay, jay, kay, gay, ef, ve, ith, 
 the and shay are followed by the sound of 1, the 1 is. in cer- 
 tain cases, indicated by a slight modification of these letters, 
 thus saving the time which otherwise would be required to 
 write the stroke el or lay. 
 
 2. The modification of these letters consists in the for- 
 mation of a small hook on the s-circle side and at the begin- 
 ning of these letters. This hook is called the 1-hook. 
 
 3. The formation of this hook on the letters and the 
 names by which these modified characters are designated are 
 shown as follows: 
 
 r c 
 
 Pel Bel Tel Del Chel Jel Kel Gel Fel Vel Thl Thel Shel 
 
68 PITMANIC 
 
 4. For convenience in referring to these modified letters 
 they are always spoken of by the above names. 
 
 5. The beginner should bear in mind that the so-called 
 1-hook does not itself stand for the sound of 1. If "it did, 
 the 1 would be read before the stroke. The hook is simply 
 a scheme of modifying or changing certain consonant stems 
 in certain cases to show that the sound of 1 is to be under- 
 stood immediately following each letter so modified. The 
 use of this principle is illustrated by the folowing words : 
 
 J \y 
 
 v 
 
 J 
 
 ^-^ 
 
 s 
 
 V , 
 
 f 
 
 
 table buahel 
 
 plume lawful clip 
 
 tidal 
 
 civil gleam 
 
 T '/ 
 
 1 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 /"L 
 
 ^~*^ 
 
 / 
 
 
 V s 
 
 cudgel chilling 
 
 mythology club 
 
 flame 
 
 level bloor 
 
 6. The rules governing the use of the 1-hook are as 
 follows : 
 
 1 i ) In words where the sound of 1 immediately follows 
 one of these strokes in the same syllable, as in clip, club, 
 gleam, plume, the modified form or 1-hook is used. 
 
 (2) When a long vowel comes between one of these 
 letters and a following 1, as in coal, bowl, cajole, the 
 stroke el or lay is used. 
 
 (3) When a short vowel intervenes between one of these 
 letters and a following 1 in words of a single syllable, as in 
 hii, bill, gill, dell, fell, the stroke is used. 
 
 (4) In words of more than one syllable, where a short 
 vowel intervenes between one of these strokes and a follow- 
 ing 1, as in .civil, bushel, lawful, the modified form or hook 
 is used, except when 1 is the last consonant in a word and 
 is followed by a sounded vowel, as in pillow, in which case 
 the stroke is used. 
 
SHORTHAND 69 
 
 7. The student should remember that these rules apply 
 only to the use of 1 when it follows one of the consonant 
 strokes mentioned at the beginning of this lesson. He should 
 also remember that in the many thousands of combinations 
 of letters there will sometimes occur words where the writer 
 will readily see that in order to secure a more easily formed 
 or clearer outline some rule must be disregarded. It is 
 impossible to formulate a set of rules which will apply to 
 every possible combination of letters in the English language. 
 It is therefore perfectly allowable to occasionally vary a 
 rule in cases where to follow it an awkward or ambiguous 
 outline would result. 
 
 EXERCISE 18. 
 Using the 1-hook write : 
 
 8. List Words. (61 1 120.) 
 
 i Label, 2 table, 3 blame, 4 flame, 5 gleam, 6 glaze, 7 glass, 
 8 glow, 9 gloss, 10 flow, ii pluck, 12 plume, 13 angle, 
 14 tangle, 15 wrangle, 16 flog, 17 flag, 18 flock, 19 inflame, 
 20 influx, 21 uncle, 22 inflammable, 23 local, 24 total, 
 25 black. 26 available, 27 smuggle, 28 tipple, 29 pliable, 
 30 click, 31. desirable, 32 fling, 33 rival, 34 ripple, 35 glue, 
 36 official. 37 pupil, 38 Mabel. 39 foretell, 40 dissemble, 
 41 plank, 42 tickle, 43 flows, 44 paddle, 45 tackle, 46 flash, 
 47 blush, 48 climb, 49 clip, 50 sublime, 51 declare, 52 evil, 
 53 legal, 54 dapple, 55 logical, 56 novelty,, 57 illegal. 58 fac- 
 ulty, 59 pledge, 60 bloom, 61 Flora. 
 
 9. Wordsigns. 
 
 / j i "A / -f- _ 
 
 angel at-all follow capable collect challenge C. O. D. difficult 
 
 until difficulty 
 
7 o PITMANIC 
 
 develop deliver each-will equal glory glorious humble comply 
 
 developed delivered call 
 
 development delivery 
 
 c 
 
 it-will most- much- people such- which-will they-will 
 
 tell likely will will children 
 
 10. Phrases. (71 i :io.) 
 
 i An-angel, 2 at-all-places, 3 the-children, 4 which- will- 
 go, 5 until-you-come, 6 they-will-make, 7 such-will-come, 
 8 comply-with-it, 9 he-is-capable, 25 10 collect-the-bill, 
 ii challenge-him, 12 he-will-collect-on-delivery, 13 a-diffi- 
 cult-thing, 14 he-is-in-difficulty, 15 develop-the-case, 16 de- 
 liver-some-coal, 17 tell-him, 50 18 equal-to-the-case, 19 call- 
 for-his-money, 20 each-will-go, 21 in-his-glory, 22 a-glor- 
 ious-day, 23 it-is-most-likely. 71 
 
 11. Sentences. (178 2:55.) 
 
 i Like angels' visits they-will be blessings to all. 2 Each- 
 will refuse to-leave until all-are ready to-go. 3 It-was a- 
 glorious-day 25 for-all humble people and-I-hope they-will 
 enjoy-many similar days in-times to-come. 4 Look closely 
 to-your tackle if-you expect 50 to-catch a-single fish. 
 5 Most-likely each-will wait for some developments before 
 following such a-poor course. 6 He-will challenge his 
 enemy to 73 a-duel and-will likely go to-his "death in-such 
 foolish business. 7 The-whole business is in-such a-tangle 
 that it-will be 100 difficult to-do anything at-all with-it. 
 8 He collects the-bills daily and-pleases all whom he deals 
 with. 9 Please to wait a-few 125 hours and-I-think he-will 
 raise the-money. 10 I-live on the-south side of-the-city, a- 
 mile-and a-half south of 150 the-postoffice. ii Write as- 
 
SHORTHAND 71 
 
 much-as possible in-this way if-yoti would-make a-success. 
 12 The-blowing snow will keep going into all places 175 for- 
 several hours. 178 
 12. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XIX. 
 
 THE R-HOOK, SEC. I. 
 
 i. The r-hook is a hook used in much the same way as 
 the 1-hook. On straight letters it is the modification of pe, 
 be, te, de, chay, jay, kay and gay, to represent a following 
 r. The r-hook is formed exactly like the 1-hook except 
 that it is placed on the opposite side of the stroke, that is, 
 on the left side of the upright strokes, and on the lower 
 side of horizontal letters. The following illustrations will 
 show the proper formation of the r-hook upon the straight 
 letters, and the names of the characters when so modified : 
 
 \ A ' 1 1 / / 
 
 Der Cher Jer Ker Ger 
 
72 PITMANIC 
 
 2. The rules governing the use of the r-hook on the 
 above letters are the same as those which govern the use of 
 the 1-hook. 
 
 3. The use of the r-hook is shown by the following illus- 
 trations : 
 
 l \ \_ r\ 
 
 V-L 
 
 XT 
 
 toper praise brake labor truck filter drunk redress 
 
 butcher germ crumb liquor gross tiger major 
 
 4. Especial care should be taken to fix in the mind the 
 distinction between the 1-hook and the r-hook. Much con- 
 fusion will result unless the student has this distinction in- 
 delibly impressed upon the mind so that he will be able to 
 use the proper hook without the least hesitation. No stu- 
 dent should think of passing this and the preceding lesson 
 until he is able to write all the words, phrases and sen- 
 tences in each lesson using both the 1-hook and r-hook cor- 
 rectly in every instance. 
 
 EXERCISE 19. 
 
 Using the r-hook write the following words : 
 
 5. List Words. (68 1 145.) 
 
 i Gray, 2 grace, 3 grim, 4 Greek, 5 grub, 6 grog, 7 brass, 
 8 breech, 9 toper, 10 ledger, IT extra, 12 pry, 13 creeper, 
 14 baker, 15 fakir, 16 educator, 17 courtesy, 18 monogram, 
 19 preface, 20 deter, 21 cruel, 22 Nebraska, 23 crop, 24 trig- 
 ger, 25 poker, 26 grasp, 27 brusque, 28 trunk, 29 crape, 
 30 grape, 31 groom, 32 cry, 33 treason, 34 crusade, 
 35 dream, 36 drake, 37 drum, 38 drug, 39 grip, 40 meagre, 
 41 maker, 42 cablegram, 43 telegram, 44 wager, 45 cross, 
 
SHORTHAND 73 
 
 46 trifle, 47 breaker, 48 bramble, 49 triangle, 50 neighbor, 
 51 copper, 52 taper, 53 greedy, 54 gravy, 55 gruesome, 
 56 group, 57 prop, 58 drop, 59 press, 60 clapper, 61 major, 
 62 Edgar, 63 intrigue, 64 encourage, 65 digress, 66 grumble, 
 67 cranny, 68 drunk. 
 6. Wordsigns, 
 
 \ c ~ ' 
 
 accuracy appear accurate brother Christian care cure 
 
 number Christianity occur 
 
 r=L^z_J_L_^_^_VA- 
 
 correct character degree doctor dear during danger Dear-Sir disappear 
 
 dark 
 
 J- ^7 ? ~\ A 
 
 disagree inaccurate larger liberty member neglect negligent 
 
 remember 
 
 principle practice practicable pure Yours-truly liberal 
 principal practical 
 
 7. Phrases. (59 i :oo.) 
 
 i Was-inaccurate, 2 it-appears, 3 they-appear, 4 you-will- 
 appear, 5 will-neglect, 6 my-brother, 7 your-brother-came, 
 8 our-brother, 9 the-Christian, 10 in-a-Christian, n our- 
 Christianityr r> 12 in-care-of, 13 no-care, 14 incurable-case, 
 15 in-any-degree, 16 during-mass, 17 you-will-neglect, 18 it- 
 is-inaccurate, 19 our-liberty, 20 large-number, 21 a-new- 
 principle, r> 22 your-practice, 23 a-character. 24 it-will-occur, 
 25 take-care/"' 9 
 
 8. In writing numbers and dates, round numbers as 
 5, 10, 30, 50, loo, 400, 1000, etc. are usually written in 
 
74 PITMANIC 
 
 Shorthand while mixed numbers as 37, 73, 105, 369, etc. 
 are expressed by the common numerals. 
 
 9. Letter. (310 5:05.) 
 
 New-York-City, N.-Y., July 8, 1904. 
 James Lyon, Jr., 
 
 Jacksonville, Florida. 
 Dear-Sir : 
 
 Yours of-the-sixth came to-day. 25 I-was looking for some 
 news and-am happy to hear that-your affairs are moving 
 along as-you desire. I-think-that in-time 50 all-those who 
 are in the-business with you will agree with your ideas. 
 This would-give-you sufficient backing so that-you may do 78 
 as-vou-like in carrying on-your celery farm. I-know that- 
 your knowledge of-celery growing, the-valuable farm you 
 have and-your proximity 100 to so large a-city as Jacksonville 
 will-bring-you success in-a-few-years. I-expect that inside 
 of- four years you- will have 125 enough clear cash. ahead to 
 buy out the-whole business and-I-hope you-will do-so. 
 You-will have any-number of-people try 150 to persuade you 
 to-take stock in-something outsid_e of the-celery business. 
 If -you should-do such-a-thing and-neglect your regular bus- 
 iness 1 "' at-all, you-will see-the-day in- which you-will rue 
 it. This-is an-age in-which success comes-to-him who 
 gives 200 his whole time to a-single-thing and-studies all its 
 many phases so thoroughly that nobody will-know how .to- 
 take any-undue advantage 225 of-him. 
 
 But it-is useless to talk of-these-things. Your knowledge 
 of business affairs is sufficient to enable-you to appreciate 
 the-force 250 of what I-have-said. 
 
 I-may possibly be in Jacksonville this fall. If I-am you- 
 niay expect me to-call at your home 275 and-make-you a-nice 
 long-visit. 
 
SHORTHAND 75 
 
 I-expect to hear soon that you have a-crop of-celery ready 
 to ship. I-notice that 300 the-price keeps up. I-am, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Thomas Phillips. 319 
 10. Translation. 
 
 
 
 LESSON XX. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 1 i ) How is em modified to represent a following 
 p or b? 
 
 (2) What is this modified character called? 
 
 (3) Is it ever allowable to use the emp sign to repre- 
 sent a p or b in a syllable following the one in which the 
 em occurs? 
 
 (4) What letters in the Longhand alphabet some- 
 times represent vowels and sometimes consonants? 
 
 (5) By what characters are these consonants and 
 the following coalescing vowels sometimes represented? 
 
76 PITMANIC 
 
 (6) In what way are the long vowels distinguished 
 from the short vowels in the coalescent signs? 
 
 (7) How are the dash distinguished from the dot 
 vowels with the w-coalescents? 
 
 (8) How are the dash distinguished from the dot 
 vowels with the y-coalescents? 
 
 (9) What governs the position of the coalescents 
 beside the consonant strokes? * 
 
 ( 10) What is the rule for placing a coalescent when 
 it occurs between two consonants? 
 
 (n) When may the coalescent signs be joined to 
 consonant strokes? 
 
 (12) Give six or more Wordsigns derived from 
 coalescents. 
 
 (13) When should the coalescent signs be used and 
 when should the simple strokes way and yea be used for 
 the consonant sounds of w and y? 
 
 (14) How may the sound of 1 be indicated when it 
 follows certain strokes? 
 
 (15) What strokes may be thus modified to show that 
 the sound of 1 follows ? 
 
 (16) What is the modification to indicate a following 
 1 called? 
 
 (17) Does the 1-hook stand for the sound of 1? 
 
 (18) What is the rule for representing an 1 when 
 it immediately follows a stroke which may be modified by 
 an 1-hook? 
 
 ( 19) When a short vowel intervenes between a stroke 
 and a following 1? 
 
 (20) When a long vowel intervenes between a stroke 
 and a following 1? 
 
 (21) What hook is written at the beginning of 
 
SHORTHAND 77 
 
 straight letters and on the side opposite the 1-hook? 
 
 (22) On which side of straight letters is this hook 
 used ? 
 
 (23) When an r immediately follows a straight letter 
 which may be modified by the r-hook and is in the same 
 syllable with the stroke, which is used, the hook or the 
 stroke ? 
 
 (24) If a short vowel intervenes between a stroke 
 and a folio wing r, when is the hook and when is the stroke 
 used ? 
 
 (25) When a long vowel intervenes which is used 
 for r, the hook or the stroke? 
 
 EXERCISE 20. 
 
 2. List Words. (65 1 130.) 
 
 Jump damp ambitious embezzle fumble sympathy encamp 
 dumping champ imbecile scamp weave witch duel cue cube 
 widow hew Jew Dubuque fuel beauty wood stew label 25 
 angle flag influx total black available pliable click desirable 
 rival Mabel foretell tickle blush legal logical illegal faculty 
 pledge extra courtesy monogram cruel crop trigger 50 grasp 
 treason meagre telegram trifle bramble triangle neighbor 
 greedy group Edgar intrigue encourage digress grumble. 05 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 Similar, similarity, speak, (speech,) yourself, impossible, 
 improve., (improved, improvement, may-be,) United- States, 
 unite, (unity,) uniform, quick, square, simple, (simply,) 
 temperate, (temperance, temperament,) important, (impor- 
 tance,) young, whose, whole, (wholly,) witness, why, white, 
 to-be, to-become, testimony, junior, senior, justice-of-the- 
 peace, yet, salvation, angel, at-all, (until,) follow, capable, 
 collect, challenge, C. O. D., difficult, (difficulty,) develop, 
 (developed, development,) deliver, (delivered, delivery,) 
 
78 PITMANIC 
 
 each- will, equal, (call,) glory, glorious, humble, comply, 
 it-will, (tell,) most-likely, much-will, people, such-will, 
 which- will, (children,) they-will, accuracy, appear, accurate, 
 brother, (number,) Christian, (Christianity,) care, (occur,) 
 cure, correct, character, degree, doctor, dear, during, (dark,) 
 clanger, Dear-Sir, disappear, disagree, inaccurate, larger, 
 liberty, member, (remember,) neglect, negligent, principle, 
 (principal,) practice, (practical,) practicable, pure, Yours- 
 truly, liberal. 
 
 4. Phrases. (51 :45.) 
 
 i Similar-cases, 2 some-similar-things, 3 much-similarity, 
 4 I-spoke, 5 a-speech, 6 a-significant, 7 saw-the-savior, 
 8 the-message-came, 9 a-simple-thing, 10 a-square-case, 25 
 1 1 temperate-clay, 12 will-unite-them, 13 will-be-temperate. 
 14 an-angel, 15 at-all-places, 16 the-children, 17 which-will- 
 go, 18 comply-with-it, 19 collect-the-bill, 20 it-appears. 51 
 
 5. Sentences. (144 2:25.) 
 
 i James Morrison, of Iowa City, Iowa, will go to Mis- 
 souri in January or February and-will-take all of-his stock 
 along if-the-roads 25 are such as-to allow him to-do so. 
 2 If-you-will take-my advice and-do-this I-know you- will 
 help all-those 50 who-are in the-business with-you as-well-as 
 receive a-fair income for-yourself on the-deal. 3 The-junior 
 justice-of-the-peace 75 will hear all the-witnesses in-this-case 
 and-will review all the-testimony with-his senior before de- 
 ciding to-which asylum the-insane youth 100 shall-go. 4 It-is- 
 wholly insufficient and so-will have-to-go back to the-depot 
 to-day so that-they may ship it tomorrow. 125 He-will chal- 
 lenge his enemy to a-duel and-will likely go to-his death 
 in-such foolish business. 144 
 
SHORTHAND 79 
 
 LESSON XXI. 
 
 THE R-HOOK, SEC. II. 
 
 1. Iii addition to the eight straight letters which are 
 modified by the r-hook, as shown in lesson nineteen, the 
 curved letters ef, ve, ith, the, ish, zhe, em and en are also 
 modified by this hook. 
 
 2. Since the r-hook is written at the beginning of 
 strokes upon which it is used and since all hooks written on 
 curved letters must come within the curve, it was necessary 
 to adopt some method to distinguish between the 1-hook 
 and r-hook on ef, ve, ith and the, the only curved letters 
 on which both the 1-hook and r-hook are used. This is done 
 by reversing these four letters in addition to modifying 
 them by the r-hook. It is possible to do this without danger 
 of confusion since ar, way, es and ze, which ef, ve, ith 
 and the form when reversed, are not modified by an initial 
 hook. 
 
 3. Ish and zhe are not modified by the 1-hook hence 
 it is possible to use the r-hook modification at the beginning 
 of these letters and on the curved side without any further 
 change. 
 
 4. Em and en have an initial hook for w the same size 
 as the r-hook. This hook will be explained later. It is 
 necessary, therefore, in order to distinguish the r-hook 
 from the w-hook, to modify these two letters in some man- 
 ner in addition to the hook. This is done' by shading em 
 and en when modified by the r-hook. No confusion with 
 emp or ing arises by shading em and en when modified 
 by the r-hook since neither emp nor ing are ever modified 
 bv an initial hook. 
 
80 PITMANIC 
 
 The rules which govern the use of the 1-hook apply to the 
 use of the r-hook on the curved letters. 
 
 5. The r-hook on the curved letters and the names of 
 the letters so modified are shown as follows : 
 
 9 ) J J 
 
 Per Ver Thr Thr Sher Zher Mer Ner 
 
 6. Illustrations of the use of the curved letters modified 
 b the r-hook are as follows : 
 
 r*\ 3 ^) J } 
 
 frame silver others lather shirk treasure rumor nourish 
 
 EXERCISE 21. 
 
 Using the r-hook write the following : 
 
 7. List Words. (60 1 125.) 
 
 i Merge, 2 energy, 3 lunar, 4 tremor", 5 femur, 6 banner, 
 7 donor, 8 leisure, 9 fisher, 10 verb, n verbal, 12 fracas, 
 13 three, 14 frock, 15 gopher, 16 liver, 17 leverage, 18 aver- 
 age, 19 Virginia, 20 dinner, 21 Denver, 22 numerous, 
 23 sheriff, 24 sugar, 25 favorite, 26 liquor, 27 freeze, 28 cov- 
 er, 29 thrush, 30 tanner, 31 bother, 32 pressure, 33 fissure, 
 34 rover, 35 Homer, 36 nourish, 37 divers, 38 frame, 
 39 proverb, 40 verbena, 41 lever, 42 reversal, 43 favor, 
 44 farmer, 45 Francis, 46 frankincense, 47 former, 48 dor- 
 mer, 49 camphor, 50 philosopher, 51 throng, 52 Andover, 
 53 machinery, 54 dishonor, 55 verse, 56 venerable, 57 lover, 
 58 nurse, 59 reverse, 60 movable. 
 
 8. Wordsigns. 
 
 withdraw which-are West-Virginia very universe university universal 
 
 every 
 
SHORTHAND 81 
 
 ? } 
 
 myself tell-us truth there, their therefore South-America recollect 
 they-are 
 
 tr 
 
 re: 
 
 V J \ 
 
 respect respectable remark proficiency pleasure probable 
 
 respectability remarkable proficient measure probably 
 
 mere, Mr. probability 
 
 *\ 
 
 
 proper perhaps sure owner overwhelm near, nor 
 
 property honor 
 
 neighborhood New-Hampshire North-America from forgive 
 
 9. Phrases. (38 :so.) 
 
 i An-average-case, 2 a-rumor-came, 3 freeze-up, 4 in- 
 trouble, 5 in-favor, 6 numerous-things, 7 saw-a-thrush, 8 a- 
 new-frock, '9 low-pressure, 10 in-the- fracas, 25 n broke-his- 
 femur, 12 nourish-him, 13 a-fisher, 14 with-much-energy, 
 15 in-his-dishonor. 38 
 
 10. Letter. (28714:45.) 
 
 Dubuque, Iowa, April 2, 1904. 
 Mr. Charles Dawson, 
 
 Minneapolis, Minn. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-take the-liberty of-writing you for some 25 advice and- 
 help. Two weeks ago I-wrote to J. P. Glover & Co., of- 
 your city asking that firm to ship me a-dozen 50 cars of hay 
 as-soon-as possible. Expecting to-receive this hay in-two- 
 weeks, the-usual time for-hay to-come through, I-took 75 
 
82 PITMANIC 
 
 advantage of the- steady rise in price here to dispose of 
 the-dozen cars for-delivery in-three-weeks from the-time 
 it was-to 100 arrive. To-day I-have a-message from Glover 
 & Co., which by mistake had the- wrong address thus caus- 
 ing a-delay in its-arrival, 1 - 3 saying in answer to a- 
 telegram that-their supply has given out and-that it-is im- 
 possible to ship a-single car to-me. Am 150 at a loss what 
 to-do so-write-you. Do-you think it-is at-all possible for- 
 you to-help-me out by shipping 175 me some of the-hay you 
 have in-stock for summer use ? 
 
 I-know that the-price wall-drop sufficiently to enable me 
 to-replace 200 the-same in ample time for-your use and-at 
 no loss to myself. Otherwise I-fear I-shail lose heavily for 
 the-price of 225 hay in-this city is very high. "If-you-will 
 help-me out I-assure you that I- will thoroughly appreciate 
 the-favor. 
 
 Please-to 250 answer by wire as-soon-as you-receive this. 
 I-await your-reply with-much anxiety, and-hope that-you- 
 will spare enough of-your 275 supply to save-me from very 
 heavy-loss. 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Thomas Johnson. 287 
 ii. Translation. 
 
SHORTHAND 83 
 
 LESSON XXII. 
 TRIPLE CONSONANTS. 
 
 1. It frequently happens that the letter s precedes one 
 of the straight letters modified to represent a following r. 
 In such cases the r-hook need not be written as it may be 
 indicated by placing the s-circle on the r-hook side. The 
 s-circle at the beginning and on the r-hook side of pe, for 
 example, would represent iss-pe-ar, thus representing three 
 consonants, hence the name, triple consonants. 
 
 2. The triple consonants are as follows : 
 
 Spr Sbr Str Sdr Schr Sjr Skr Sgr 
 
 3. The use of the triple consonants is shown in the fol- 
 lowing words : 
 
 
 spring sober stream cedar scrape such-are segregate sojourner sister 
 
 4. As appears in the illustrations either a long or short 
 vowel may occur between the s-circle and a following stroke 
 with which ah r-hook is understood. 
 
 5. There is no word in which the combination schr 
 occurs. The character is used, however, for the phrase 
 signs such-are, such-were, etc. 
 
 6. It will be evident to the student of Shorthand that 
 the combination of the three consonants explained above 
 cannot be used with any of the curved letters. 
 
 7. The sez-circle may also be placed upon the r-hook 
 side of straight letters to indicate the r-hook as in the word 
 sister. 
 
84 PITMANIC 
 
 8. In such words as discourage, subscribe, describe. 
 and others with similar outlines, the r-hook cannot be indi- 
 cated, the context being depended upon to show that the 
 r is to be understood. 
 
 9. The large majority of cases in which the triple con- 
 sonants are used is with the combinations spr, str, and skr. 
 
 EXERCISE 22. 
 Using the triple consonants write : 
 
 10. List Words. (45 i :oo.) 
 
 i Scrap, 2 scraper, 3 scruple, 4 soaker, 5 seeker, 6 scrub, 
 7 strap, 8 scourge, 9 skirmish, 10 sober, n cider, 12 solder, 
 13 strip, 14 scream, 15 scrim, 16 scratch, 17 spring, 18 sperm, 
 19 spurs, 20 stroke, 21 stream, 22 superstitious, 23 sabre, 
 24 stretch, 25 stress, 26 strew, 27 streak, 28 strow, 29 succor, 
 30 discourage, 31 supper, 32 prescribe, 33 strop, 34 subscribe, 
 35 proscribe, 36 scrawny, 37 super, 38 sacrifice, 39 strike, 
 40 superb, 41 striker, 42 screech, 43 secrecy, 44 stripe, 
 45 suitor. 
 
 11. Wordsigns. 
 
 *\ 9 
 
 - ^ X . / / \- 
 
 surprise express suppress eecure such-are such-were scripture as-it-were 
 
 describe 
 
 America belong commercial external humor honorable more 
 belonged mercy 
 
 must-have satisfy-led in-re- 
 satisfactory ply-to 
 satisfaction 
 
SHORTHAND 85 
 
 12. Phrases. (56 150.) 
 
 i A-spring-day, 2 secure-a-copy, 3 such-are-here, 4 a- 
 scripture-topic, 5 have-no-mercy, 6 pay-the-mortgage, 
 7 will-forgive-them, 8 more-money, o, commercial-dealings, 25 
 10 in-such-manner, n have-mercy, 12 honor-all-people, 
 13 may-forgive-them, 14 large-measure, 15 every-case, 
 1 6 scripture-lesson, 17 give-them-honor, 18 express-the-case, 
 19 honorable-life, 50 20 will-homor-them, 21 they-receive- 
 more. 56 
 
 13. Letter. (185 3:00.) 
 
 New- York-City, N.-Y., Feb. 4, 1904. 
 Mr. Thomas Boyle, Sr., 
 
 Duluth, Minn. 
 Dear-Sir: 
 
 Your notice to Mr. Titus Bailey telling 25 him that-you 
 must-have your pay before-you-would ship-him the-coal he 
 should-have on March fourth, was a-surprise to me. 50 I- 
 know you-must-have a-wrong idea as-to Mr. Bailey's ability 
 to pay his bills. I-have for some years had business deal- 
 ings with 75 Mr. Bailey and-I-have never-had a-bill due from- 
 him but which he-has given the-proper-care. I-hope this 
 assurance will 100 cause you to-take a-more favorable view 
 of-the-case and-ship this week the-coal Mr. Bailey desires 
 for his factory. If-you 125 refuse to-do so I-am-sure you- 
 will lose a-customer who, otherwise, would I-think, continue 
 to buy of-you for-many years 150 to-come. I-hope you-will 
 take-my advice in-this for I-know Mr. Bailey will do what- 
 is right and-fair in-his 175 dealings with-you. I-am, 
 
 Yours-very-truly, 
 
 James Gilmer. 185 
 
86 PITMANIC 
 
 14. Letter. (130 2:10.) 
 
 Toledo, Ohio, July 2, 1904. 
 
 Mr. Ezra Weeks, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 My-Deaf : Sir : 
 
 I-have your favor of May 3oth. I-have 25 looked for a- job 
 for-you as clerk in fully forty business houses in-this city 
 but so far it-is impossible for me to 50 write-you very encour- 
 aging news. Hence my long-delay in answering-you. 
 There-are several-places in-which I-was given some hope 
 and-at 75 the-bazaar I-may yet succeed in-inducing the-pro- 
 prietor to-give-you a-trial. If I-succeed I-will write-you 
 forthwith. Would you 100 be-ready to-come in-a-few days 
 in-case I secure a-place for-you? Please to-write-me as- 
 ,soon-as you-receive 125 this. 
 
 Truly-yours, 
 
 Samuel Culver. 130 
 
 15. Letter. (143 2:15.) 
 
 Cincinnati, Ohio, March 6, 1904. 
 
 Messrs. Cady & Co., 
 
 Jacksonville, Fla. 
 Dear-Sirs : 
 
 Hearing that-you were thinking of-employing some-more 25 
 help in-your grocery I-take the-liberty of-applying for-the- 
 place. I-know something of the-grocery business having 
 given nearly eight years 50 of-my-life to-it. As I-am-very 
 anxious to-go south I-hope you-will favor me in the-choice 
 of a-clerk. 75 I-know I-would suit-you. My-reason for de- 
 siring to-leave here is to secure a-change for-my-health. 
 The-doctor advises me 100 to-do this as-soon-as possible. 
 I-would-be satisfied with very low wages for a-few months 
 
SHORTHAND 87 
 
 during which time I-will satisfy 125 you of-my ability. 
 Please to-reply at an-early day ami-oblige. 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Francis Keller. 143 
 16. Translation. 
 
 -7-r y] I v^. /^v.v_^( VTA 1 . ^ J L 
 
 LESSON XXIII. 
 
 THE W-HOOK, SEC. I. 
 
 1. The consonant sound of w, when it precedes and is 
 in the same syllable with em, en, ray or lay, is represented 
 by a small initial hook, called the w-hook. This hook is 
 the same size as the 1-hook, but differs from it in that the 
 hook itself is a modified coalescent and represents the 
 sound of w. It must, therefore, be read before the stroke 
 upon which it is formed. Either a long or short vowel or 
 diphthong may intervene between the w represented by the 
 w-hook and a following em, en, ray or lay. The strokes 
 thus modified are called wem, wen, wer and wel. 
 
 2. The formation of the w-hook and its use is illustrated 
 in the following words: 
 
88 PITMANIC 
 
 won window womb welfare unwell work wore swore 
 
 3. The w-hook on em and en cannot be confused with 
 the r-hook on these letters since with the latter hook these 
 two letters are shaded. 
 
 4. When this hook precedes the sound of 1, lay is used 
 even though the general rule calls for el, as in wail, well, 
 etc. 
 
 EXERCMSE 23. 
 
 Using the w-hook write the following words : 
 
 5. List Words. (36 140.) 
 
 i Edwin, 2 window, 3 swim, 4 work, 5 worth, 6 William. 
 7 swear, 8 wealth, 9 Welch, 10 willing, n win, 12 worthy, 
 13 welfare, 14 Wilsey, 15 beware, 16 wen, 17 worker, 
 18 willingness, 19 wine, 20 wear, 21 warble, 22 wallow, 
 23 Wilkes, 24 Wilson, 25 wail, 26 wool, 27 weal, 28 wile, 
 29 winsome, 30 winning, 31 wench, 32 worse, 33 swell, 
 34 wince, 35 wean, 36 unworthy. 
 
 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 ^r Vo \/7 . y </ ,/ / ^ 
 
 IS 
 
 more-or member-of- member-of- nowhere we-are where aware when 
 less congress the-legislature 
 
 while well awhile with-me with- him with- inquiry welcome 
 
 we-will with-my we-may whom anywhere 
 
 7. Phrases. (62 i :oo.) 
 
 i See-the-window, 2 in-the-window, 3 in-the-river, 4 be- 
 ware-of-wine, 5 the-inquiry-came, 6 pure-wool, 7 an-angle- 
 
SHORTHAND 89 
 
 worm, 8 winsome-lass, 9 the-sparrow-warbles, 25 10 a-worse- 
 case, ii make-more-worry, 12 was-a-member-of-congress, 
 13 he-is-aware, 14 he-is- worthy, 15 unworthy-youth, 16 was- 
 a- worker, 17 in-the-work, r>0 18 where- was-it, 19 any-one, 
 20 willing-to, 21 worth-much, 22 in-the-commonwealth. 02 
 
 8. Letter. (281 4:40.) 
 
 Columbus, Ohio, April 14, 1904. 
 
 Professor William Wilson, 
 
 Sioux City, Iowa. 
 My-Dear-Professor : 
 
 Replying to-your very welcome favor of 23 March 31. It- 
 is very pleasing to me to-hear how much you-are doing to 
 secure me the-place in the-college at 50 . Sioux City. I-feel 
 that if-the-place is given to me I-will please the-trustees. 
 I-think from my long and-thorough drill 75 in-teaching the- 
 subject of biology I would have no-difficulty in-satisfying 
 the-trustees as-to my-ability as teacher of-this subject. All 100 
 I-desire is-a-fair trial. If-my work suits I-would be willing 
 to-take the-place at the-same-salary which- was given 123 the- 
 former professor. I-know-that the-class of-work which the- 
 college should-have and-such-as the- faculty expects, judg- 
 ing from what you 150 have-said to-me, is well worth that- 
 much. 
 
 I-think it-is impossible for the-college to secure for a- 
 smaller salary a-teacher 175 who-has sufficient ability to fill 
 the-place and-please all the-officials of the-school. 
 
 If-there is any-thing-more that I should 200 do to enable 
 the-trustees to settle the-business, I-wish you-would wire 
 me what-it-is, also the-proper way to take-it 225 up with the- 
 officials. 
 
 I-hope some day to-fully repay-you for the-help-you have 
 given-me in-trying to secure this place 250 for-me. I-feel 
 
90 PITMANIC 
 
 that I-shall succeed and-am well-aware to-whom I-shall owe 
 my-success in-case the-trustees select me. 275 I-am, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Thomas Wilbur. 281 
 9. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXIV. 
 
 THE W-HOOK, SEC. II. 
 
 i. In addition to the small w-hook used on em, en, lay 
 and ray and representing the w preceding the stroke to 
 which it is joined, we have what is called the large w-hook, 
 formed at the beginning and on the s-circle side of te, de, 
 kay and gay. This hook is a modification of these four 
 straight letters to indicate that a w immediately follows 
 these letters. The form and use of this hook are shown in 
 the followincr words : 
 
 twig twice dwell quorum squaw anguish twinkle quoth 
 
SHORTHAND 91 
 
 2. This w-hook, like the 1-hook and the r-hook, does 
 not stand for a letter preceding the stroke, but is, instead, 
 a modification of the strokes te, de, kay and gay, to indicate 
 a following w. The w-hook on te, de, kay and gay is 
 used for w only when it immediately follows one of these 
 letters and is in the same syllable with it. 
 
 3. This hook should be made sufficiently large to avoid 
 any danger of confusion with the 1-hook, which is used on 
 these same strokes. The letters modified with the large 
 w-hook are called twa, dwa, kwa and gwa. 
 
 4. It should be noted that the hooks are divided, in 
 regard to size, into two classes; ist, small hooks, like the 
 1-hook, r-hook and small w-hook; 2nd, large hooks, like 
 the w-hook explained above. 
 
 EXERCISE 24. 
 
 Using the large w-hook write the following : 
 
 5. List Words. (39 i :oo.) 
 
 i Quip, 2 quibble, 3 quash, 4 quarry, 5 Guelph, 6 guano, 
 7 twill, 8 dwell, 9 liquid, 10 quiver, n squeak, 12 squire, 
 13 quad, 14 vanquish, 15 queer, 16 equip, 17 requite, 
 18 squabble, 19 squatter, 20 squaw, 21 squeal, 22 squawk, 
 23 squawker, 24 equator, 25 lingual, 26 sequel, 27 require, 
 28 requisite, 29 bequeath, 30 quake, 31 loquacious, 32 ex- 
 quisite, 33 quarter, 34 quoth, 35 queerly, 36 query, 37 twin- 
 kle, 38 quote, 39 quail. 
 
 ~"/~ 
 
 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 liberty-of liberty-of- messenger this- in-reference-to influential 
 
 the-prees the-people will 
 
92 PITMANIC 
 
 \ , 
 
 ownership in-respect-to behalf Jesus- L,ord-Jesus- just-had 
 
 Christ Christ 
 
 7. Phrases. (50 :45.) 
 
 i Many-quips, 2 in-their-quibble, 3 quash-it, 4 such- 
 squibs, 5 require-such, 6 liquid-mass, 7 a-squatter, 8 use-a- 
 quill, 9 loquacious-fellow, 10 may-requite-him, 1 1 such-twin- 
 kles, 25 12 many-queer-things, 13 they-equalize-it, JJ4 wili- 
 vanquish, 15 a-queer-thing, 16 the-earth-quakes, 17 very- 
 loquacious, 18 quoth-the-doctor, 19 quote-him, 20 your- 
 d welling, 21 bequeath-money. 50 
 
 8. Letter. (321 5:20.) 
 
 Toledo, Ohio, March i, 1904. 
 Professor Edison, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Dear-Sir : 
 
 Replying to-yours of the-6th, I-think you-must-be 25 very- 
 much in error in-reference-to the-editor of-the Times. I-am 
 sure he-has no-such ideas as-you seem to-suppose 50 judging 
 from the-speech which-you delivered at the- jubilee dinner 
 in Cincinnati, Ohio. I-know Mr. Watson, the-editor of-the 
 Times, very well 75 and-call at-his office every day or two 
 and-discuss with-him the-social topics of the-day. While 
 he-is always very-liberal 100 in-his-views he-thinks-it unwise 
 to-give any-more-liberty to-the-press. He-is well-aware 
 that usually no-danger would-arise 125 if the-press were given 
 all the-liberty possible. At the-same time he-says that-it-is 
 possible for some person who-has-no 130 sympatny with our- 
 system of-laws to acquire the-ownership of-some large and- 
 influential city paper. In-this-day with the-press having 
 so 175 wide an-influence, would-it be-wise, therefore, he-asks, 
 to annul all-laws which in-any-manner lessen the-liberty-of- 
 
SHORTHAND 93 
 
 the-press? Hence 200 he-thinks-that the-press is already 
 sufficiently free for all-practical purposes. I-think Mr. Wat- 
 son is right and-shall, as presiding officer of 225 the-senate, 
 veto the-bill now before that body in-case it-passes the- 
 house and-comes before me. I-am sure that-when you 250 
 think -this subject-over more thoroughly you-will agree-with 
 Mr. Watson as-to the-proper course to-pursue. I-am aware 
 it-is unlikely 275 that any-such-dangers will-ever arise, yet 
 it-is the-wise thing to-prepare for-all possible evils which- 
 may arise, and which-are 300 the-more-likely to-come if-we 
 leave the-doors swinging wide to-them. I-am, 
 
 Very sincerely-yours, 
 
 James Irwin. 321 
 9. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXV. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 v 
 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 ( i ) Which curved letters are modified by the r-hook ? 
 (2) Which of the curved letters with which the r-hook 
 
94 PITMANIC 
 
 is used have no other modifications except the addition of 
 the r-hook? Jj 
 
 (3) In what way are ef, ve, ith and the modified, 
 besides adding the hook, to indicate a following r? 
 
 (4) In what way are em and en modified, besides 
 adding the hook, to show a following r? 
 
 (5) Are the letters ar, way, es, or ze ever modified 
 with any initial hook? 
 
 (6) Why is it necessary to shade or reverse some 
 curved letters and not others when an r-hook is added? 
 
 (7) Does emp or ing ever have an initial hook? 
 
 (8) Name the triple-consonants. 
 
 (9) How are they formed? 
 
 ( 10) With what strokes are the triple-consonants 
 used ? 
 
 (n) Give a few illustrations in which triple-conso- 
 nants are used. 
 
 (12) Can the triple-consonant principle be used with 
 curved strokes ? 
 
 (13) Are there any words in which the combination 
 schr may be used? 
 
 (14) For what purpose is this combination of Short- 
 hand characters used? 
 
 (15) May the sez-circle ever be placed on the r-hook 
 side of straight letters the same as the s-circle is in triple- 
 consonants? 
 
 ( 16) In what class of words is the r-hook understood ? 
 
 (17) With which strokes do the triple-consonants 
 most frequently occur? 
 
 (18) What is the small w-hook? 
 
 (19) What letters are modified by it? ' 
 
 (20) In what way does it differ from the 1-hook? 
 
SHORTHAND 95 
 
 (21) May any v<nvel occur between a w-hook and 
 the following stroke? 
 
 (22) Ho\v is all danger of confusion avoided between 
 the w-hook on em and en and the r-hook on these letters? 
 
 (23) On what letters besides lay, ray, em and en J~ 
 may a w-hook be used? 
 
 (24) In what three ways do the two w-hooks differ? 
 
 (25) On which side of the stroke is the large w-hook 
 written? 
 
 EXERCISE 25. 
 
 2. List Words. (60 i :2o.) 
 
 Energy banner fracas frock Virginia thrush tanner pres- 
 sure nourish tuner Francis frankincense Andover machinery 
 reverse scraper soaker scrub strap skirmish scratch stress 
 strew discourage prescribe 25 scrawny striker screech secrecy 
 suitor Edwin work William Welch win worker willingness 
 wine warble Wilson wool wile wench worse wince quibble 
 unworthy quip Guelph guano 50 twill dwell liquid squeak 
 squaw squeal bequeath loquacious exquisite twinkle. 60 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 Withdraw, which-arc. West- Virginia, very, (every,) uni- 
 verse, university, universal, myself, tell-us, truth, there, 
 (their, they-are,) therefore, South- America, recollect, re- 
 spect, respectable, (respectability,) remark, (remarkable, 
 mere, Mr.,) proficient, (proficiency,) pleasure, (measure,) 
 probable, (probably, probability.) proper, (property,) per- 
 haps, sure, owner, overwhelm, near, (nor, honor.) neighbor- 
 hood, New-Hampshire, North-America, from, forgive, sur- 
 prise, express, suppress, secure, such-are, such-were, scrip- 
 ture, (describe,) as-it-were, America, belong, (belonged.) 
 commercial, external, humor, honorable, more, (mercy,) 
 manner, merciful, mortgage, must-have, satisfy, (satisfied, 
 
96 PITMANIC 
 
 satisfactory, satisfaction,) in-reply-to,, more-or-less, mem- 
 ber-of-Congress, member-of-the-legislature, nowhere, we- 
 are, where, aware, when, while, (we-will,) well, awhile, 
 with-me, (with-my,) with-him, (we-may,) with- whom, in- 
 quiry, (anywhere,) welcome, liberty-of-the-press, liberty-of- 
 the-people, messenger, this-will, in-reference-to, influential, 
 ownership, in-respect-to, behalf, Jesus-Christ, Lord-Jesus- 
 Christ, just-had. 
 
 4. Phrases. (83 1 120.) 
 
 i A-rumor-came, 2 in-trouble, 3 in-favor, 4 numerous- 
 things, 5 low-pressure, 6 nourish-him, 7 a-fisher, 8 with- 
 much-energy, 9 a-spring-day, 10 more-money, II have- 
 mercy, 25 12 honor-all-people, 13 large-measure, 14 every- 
 case, 15 give-them-honor, 16 express-the-case, 17 will-honor- 
 them, 18 they-receive-more, 19 in-the-window, 20 in-the- 
 river, 50 21 beware-of-wine, 22 a- worthy-case, 23 a- worse- 
 case, 24 he-is-aware, 25 he-is-worthy, 26 was-a-worker, 
 27 where-was-it, 28 any-one, 29 worth-much, 75 30 many- 
 quips, 31 quash-it, 32 require-such, 33 very-loquacious. 83 
 
 5. Letter. (321 5:20.) 
 
 Toledo, Ohio, March i, 1904. 
 Professor Edison, 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Dear-Sir : 
 
 Replying to-yours of the-6th, I-think you-must-be 25 very- 
 much in error in-reference-to the-editor of-the Times. I-am 
 sure he-has no-such ideas as-you seem to-suppose 50 judging 
 from the-speech which-you delivered at the- jubilee dinner 
 in Cincinnati, Ohio. I-know Mr. Watson, the-editor of-the 
 Times, very well 75 and-call at-his office every day or two 
 and-discuss with-him the-social topics of the-day. While 
 he-is always very-liberal 100 in-his-views he-thinks-it unwise 
 to-give any-more-liberty to-the-press. He-is well-aware 
 
SHORTHAND 97 
 
 that usually no-danger would-arise 125 if the-press were given 
 all the-liberty possible. At the-same time he-says that-it-is 
 possible for some person who-has-no 150 sympathy with our- 
 system of-laws to acquire the-ownership of-some large and- 
 influential city paper. In-this-day with the-press having 
 so 175 wide an-influence, would-it be-wise, therefore, he-asks, 
 to annul all-laws which in-any-manner lessen the-liberty-of- 
 the-press ?*/ Hence 200 he-thinks-that the-press is already suffi- 
 ciently free for all-practical purposes. I-think Mr. Watson 
 is right and-shall, as presiding officer of 2 - 5 the-senate, veto 
 the-bill now before that body in-case it-passes the-house 
 and-comes before me. I-am sure that-when you 250 think- 
 this subject-over more thoroughly you-will agree- with Mr. 
 Watson as-to the-proper course to-pursue. I-am aware it-is 
 unlikely 275 that any-such-dangers will-ever arise yet 
 it-is the-wise -thing to-prepare for-all possible evils which- 
 may arise, and which-are 300 the-more-likely to-come if-we 
 leave the-doors swinging wide to-them. I-am, 
 
 Very sincerely-yours, 
 
 James Irwin. 321 
 
 
 LESSON XXVI. 
 !/ 
 
 THE REL-HOOK AND LER-HOOK. 
 
 1. The sound of 1 very frequently follows the sound of 
 m, n or r and usually coalesces very closely with it. In such 
 cases the en, em or ray is modified by a large initial hook 
 called the rel-hook to indicate that an 1 follows. This hook 
 is several times larger than the w-hook on these letters. 
 
 2. Similar to this hook is a large initial hook on lay 
 
98 PITMANIC 
 
 to indicate a following r. This is called the ler-hook. 
 
 3. The use of the rel-hook and ler-hook is shown in 
 the following words : 
 
 penal barrel family polar collar lurch 
 
 4. These two hooks may be used when either a long or 
 short vowel intervenes between the stroke and the 1 or r 
 indicated by the rel-hook or the ler-hook. The 1 or r indi- 
 cated is usually in the same syllable with the stroke, but 
 not necessarily so. The characters mel and nel are not used 
 in single syllable words or where they would be the only 
 consonants in the word as kneel, nail, annual, mole. This 
 of course, does not apply to their use as wordsigns. 
 
 5. These characters are spoken of as mel, nel, rel and 
 ler. 
 
 EXERCISE 26. 
 
 Using the rel-hook and the ler-hook write the following 
 words : 
 
 6. List Words. (57 1 125.) 
 
 i Enroll, 2 relic, 3 rule, 4 final, 5 penal, 6 journal, 7 rail- 
 way, 8 tunnel, 9 signal, 10 analyze, n female, 12 spinal, 
 13 relish, 14 chronology, 15 analogy, 16 barrel, 17 scholar, 
 18 polar, 19 secular, 20 choler, 21 jocular, 22 camel, 23 senti- 
 nel, 24 release, 25 penalty, 26 original, 27 Nelson, 28 millen- 
 ium, 29 plural, 30 relate, 31 rural, 32 spiral, 33 temporal, 
 34 autumnal, 35 lurch, 36 larva, 37 larynx, 38 larceny, 
 39 larch, 40 signalize, 41 canal, 42 analagous, 43 Daniel, 
 44 kernel, 45 calomel, 46 malfeasance, 47 malefactor, 48 Mal- 
 colm, 49 animal, 50 pommel, 51 nominal, 52 realize, 53 realm, 
 54 rulable, 55 rolling, 56 color, 57 squirrel. 
 
DALLAS, TEX43 
 
 SHORTHAND 99 
 
 7. Wordsigns. 
 
 only unless reliable railway-car relinquish laws-of-life 
 
 ^c 
 
 iaws-of- everlasting evtrlasting- ever-and- for-ever- muet-like 
 
 health life ever and-ever 
 
 \ 
 
 8. Phrases. (58* i :oo.) 
 
 i Release-them, 2 their-penalty, 3 all-their-camels, 4 they- 
 relate, 5 you-will-realize, 6 a-malefactor, 7 a-large-canal, 
 8 tell-the-colonel, 9 railway-track, 10 an-autumnal-day, 25 
 ii the-king's-realm, 12 saw-a-signal, 13 the-original-canal, 
 14 very-many-colors, 15 a-j ocular- fellow, 16 he-will-relate, 
 17 rolling-stock, 18 a-relic, 19 a-fmal-case, 50 20 a-new-signal, 
 21 they-relish, 22 in-a-tunnel. 58 
 
 9. Letter. (200 3 120.) 
 
 Sandusky, Ohio, July 4, 1904. 
 Mr. Edgar Thomas, Jr., 
 
 Denver, Colorado. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-am this-day in receipt of-your 25 final-notice. The-sum 
 of-money which-you-will realize from the-business is, I-am- 
 sorry to say, very-much below what I-was 50 expecting. I- 
 was sure that-you would secure enough to pay off ail-that 
 you are owing and-have enough besides to-set you up 75 in- 
 business in Denver. Was-there a-fall in-prices, or what-was 
 the-trouble? I-am unable now to see why your property 
 should 100 sell for so-small a-sum unless there-was fear the- 
 supply of-ore would soon give-out. I-scarcely think, how- 
 ever, that-this-is 123 the-cause. I-shall await with-much 
 
ioo PITMANIC 
 
 iety more details from-you. I-hope, however, that-you real- 
 ize the-necessity of-keeping up your courage 150 notwith- 
 standing your heavy-losses. I-know that-you-will come- 
 out all-right in-time if-you- will-only keep up your courage. 
 I-hope 175 to-have a-reply from-you inside of a-week with- 
 details in-reference-to the-sale of-your property. 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Jacob Nelson. 200 
 
 10. Letter, (ioo i :4O.) 
 
 Minneapolis, Minn., May 9, 1904. 
 Sears, Roebuck & Co., 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Sirs : 
 
 T-enclose eight dollars for which please-to ship me 25 
 the-following by-express as-soon-as possible: 
 
 1 No. 6 baby cab $3-QO 
 
 2 doz. No. 4 tooth brushes 2.25 50 
 
 i doz. 2 oz. tooth powder 2.25 
 
 i pair No. 2 lady's scissors .50 
 
 Total $8.00 
 
 I-shall look-for 75 these on Thursday. It-will-be neces- 
 sary, therefore, for-you to ship them the-same day you-re- 
 ceive this. I-am, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Amos Benson. 100 
 
SHORTHAND 101 
 
 ii. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXVII. 
 
 THE H-TICK. 
 
 i. The stroke hay when followed by kay, gay, em, lay, 
 way or ar, does not form an angle that is easily or quickly 
 made. In such cases, therefore, a tick is used to represent 
 the aspirate h when it is followed by one of these letters. 
 The tick made use of is like the last half of the sign for I. 
 Like the wordsign for he, this tick when used for the aspirate 
 before kay, gay, lay, em, way or ar must always be written 
 with a downward stroke. Written thus it forms a distinct 
 angle with the letter to which it is joined. This tick takes 
 the position of the stroke to which it is joined. The follow- 
 ing words will illustrate the use of the h-tick: 
 
 V _ 
 
 harp hack whip hale hag hem whiskey whistle bam 
 
102 PITMANIC 
 
 EXERCISE 27. 
 Using the h-tick write the following: 
 
 2. List Words. (36 :so.) 
 
 i Horse, 2 harp, 3 hark, 4 hem, 5 Hector, 6 harsh, 7 ham, 
 8 Hume, 9 hum, 10 wheel, n whip, 12 whack, 13 whistle, 
 14 wheedle, 15 whale, 16 whig, 17 hecatomb, 18 hoax, 
 19 hack, 20 horsewhip, 21 whipple, 22 Higley, 23 hook, 
 24 hug, 25 hame, 26 hare, 27 hale, 28 howl, 29 hill, 30 hick- 
 ory, 31 harmony, 32 hymn, 33 whisper, 34 holiday, 35 hex- 
 agonal, 36 hymnal. 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 S" 8" "> ^ ^\ V) l/\^ / r"-\ x""d ? , 
 
 must-make one-or- two-or- three-or- most- must- 
 
 two three four important expect 
 
 4. Phrases. (50 :45.) 
 
 i Manv-horses, 2 a-new-harp, 3 a-long-time, 4 a-hectic- 
 glow, 5 two-hames, 6 humming-noises, 7 in-harm's-way, 
 8 new-hymnal, 9 many-whales, 10 a-long-horsewhip, 25 
 ii a-funny-hoax, 12 several-hacks-came, ,13 no-harmony, 
 14 all-holidays, 15 several-hooks, 16 the-hill-top, 17 raise-a- 
 howl, 1 8 take-the-money, 19 one-or-two-more. 50 
 
 5. Letter. (136 2:15.) 
 
 Wheeling, West-Virginia, July 6, 1904. 
 Messrs. Craig Bros., 
 
 Syracuse, N.-Y. 
 Dear-Sirs : 
 
 I-have your telegram to J. B. Hayes 25 and-hasten to 
 reply. I-mail you to-day circular which-will give-you the- 
 sizes of all the-wheels I-make. I-hope that 50 my-prices, 
 which-are very-low, will-induce-you to-give my new make 
 of car wheels which I-design especially for heavy passenger 
 
SHORTHAND 103 
 
 coaches 75 a-fair trial. I-am sure that-they-will bear up as- 
 well and-wear as-long-as any-wheels now in-use. They- 
 have 100 an-exceedingly smooth bore, while the-dressing on 
 trie-outer rim is unusually true, thus-causing the-wheels to- 
 revolve very-smoothly on the-axle. 12 "' 
 
 I-hope to-receive a-favorable reply. 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Michael Mechem. 130 s 
 
 6. Letter. (137 2:15.) 
 
 Newburg, New- York, March 10, 1904. 
 Cole Bros., 
 
 Sioux Falls, South Dakota. 
 Dear-Sirs : 
 
 Replying to-your favor of March 8. 25 We-are sorry to 
 in form -you that-it- will-be impossible for us to ship-you any- 
 of the-smaller sizes of shoes inside of r ' two-weeks. Since 
 the-fourth of the-month calls have come from jobbers for- 
 several unusually large supplies, mostly of-children's shoes, 
 hence our-stock 75 of-small shoes is exceedingly low/- We- 
 will rush the-work on-these sizes and-hope to-help-you out 
 in-time to-supply your 100 customers. Please to inform us 
 what sizes you-require right-away and-we-will make a-rush 
 job of the-special sizes you-must-have. 1 - 5 
 
 Thanking-you for-your favor, we-are, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Higley & Co. 137 
 
104 PITMANIC 
 
 7. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXVIII. 
 
 THE F-HOOK. 
 
 1. The f-hook is a small final hook written upon the 
 s-circle side of all straight letters. A letter thus modified 
 indicates a following f or v. The context will in every case 
 indicate whether f or v is meant. The letters modified by 
 the f-hook are called pef, pev, bef, bev, tef, tev, etc. 
 
 2. Any vowel, diphthong or coalescent may intervene 
 between a stroke and an f or v indicated by the f-hook. 
 
 3. The f-hook is shown in the following words : 
 
 Vv ~L I, / / 
 
 4. When f or v follows a straight letter and comes 
 before another consonant in the same word, the writer must 
 use his own judgment whether to use the hook or the stroke 
 for f or v, always selecting the one which forms the better 
 
SHORTHAND 105 
 
 angle with what follows. In case each forms an equally 
 good angle, preference should be given to the hook, as it 
 is more quickly written. Usually, when medial, a hook, 
 following one of the straight letters, makes fully as good 
 an angle as the stroke and hence is the more frequently 
 written. 
 
 5. As a rule the f-hook is used only 'for an f or v in 
 the same syllable with the stroke upon which it is formed. 
 When a better angle or a more easily formed outline may 
 be made it is allowable to vise the f-hook for an f or v in 
 a following syllable, as in devote. 
 
 6. When an f or v is the last consonant in an outline 
 and is followed by a sounded vowel, the stroke is used. If 
 not followed by a sounded vowel, the f-hook is used as 
 shown in the following words : 
 
 grave gravy huff heavy puff puffy deaf defy 
 
 7. When an iss follows the f-hook it is written within 
 the hook. 
 
 EXERCISE 28. 
 
 Using the f-hook, when proper, write the following 
 words : 
 
 8. List Words. (60 i rss.) 
 
 i Cave, 2 grave, 3 rave, 4 dove, 5 glove, 6 grove, 7 pave, 
 8 gave, 9 traffic, 10 devote, n havoc, 12 graphic, 13 cough, 
 14 gravely, 15 bivouac, 16 bluff, 17 brief, 18 chief, 19 cliff, 
 20 cuff, 21 chaff, 22 skiff, 23 behave, 24 reef, 25 David, 
 26 gruff, 27 groove, 28 cleave, 29 engrave, 30 reprove, 
 31 bereave, 32 hive, 33 hove, 34 deserve, 35 serve, 36 ob- 
 serve, 37 rove, 38 braves, 39 heaves, 40 cloves, 41 deafen, 
 42 lithograph, 43 surf, 44 province, 45 clef, 46 trough, 
 
io6 
 
 PITMANIC 
 
 47 rough, 48 defense, 49 rive, 50 toughen, 51 Jove, 52 cavil, 
 53 graven, 54 strive, 55 drive, 56 above, 57 huff, 58 crave, 
 59 beef, 60 provincial. 
 9. Wordsigns. 
 
 i / 
 
 1 
 
 / 
 
 I 
 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 ought-to-have which-have 
 it-ought-to-have whichever 
 
 out-of 
 it-would-have 
 
 which-ought 
 to-have 
 
 whatever 
 
 So % 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1. 
 
 belief perfect 
 believe 
 
 poverty 
 
 careful 
 carefully 
 
 differ-ed 
 different 
 difference 
 
 I / 
 
 / 
 
 S 
 
 i n r* 
 
 derive each-will-have 
 
 which-will have 
 
 much-will- 
 have 
 
 govern-ed 
 governor 
 government 
 
 10. Phrases. (72 i :io.) 
 
 i In-a-cave, 2 a-grave-case, 3 see-the-dove, 4 a-pretty- 
 grove, 5 in-the-grove, 6 pave-the-way, 7 gave-money, 
 8 heavy-traffic, 9 has-a-cough, 25 10 over-the-bluff, n brief- 
 case, 12 a-new-cuff, 13 in-the-skiff, 14 on-the-reef, 15 drive- 
 it-away, 16 the-hive, 17 he-will-engrave, 18 they-reprove- 
 him, 50 19 the-noise-deafens, 20 some-lithographs-came, 
 21 a-long-trough, 22 in-his-defense, 23 a-new-incentive, 
 24 strive-to-succeed, 25 each-will-have-enough. 72 
 
 11. Letter. (257 4:15.) 
 
 Savannah, Georgia, Nov. 28, 1904. 
 Miss Jessie Ladue, 
 
 Dallas, Texas. 
 Dear Miss Ladue : 
 
 Replying to-yours of a-week ago Saturday 25 I-mail you 
 to-day a-circular which-will inform-you when our-term 
 
 
SHORTHAND 107 
 
 closes. The-new law, in-reference-to the-length of-terms 50 
 at schools of-our class, goes-into effect at the-close of- 
 this year. 
 
 . \s-soon-as you decide what work you- will take up 75 write- 
 me fully and-I-will take-pleasure in-having everything 
 ready for-you when-you-come. 
 
 Our school is very thorough in every course. 100 We 
 give especial drill in-piano and-v.ocal music. We(jils9^ha ve 
 an-unusually capable teacher for the-harp. Our large chor- 
 al-class of eighty^ 5 .- ladies gives ample drill in-vocal-work. 
 
 Our scholars, as-a-rule, have-no-difficulty in securing all 
 the-pupils it-is possible for-them ir ' to teach as-soon-as the} r 
 locate and-people come to know from what school they have 
 a-diploma. If-you-will take our course 175 and-do the- work 
 thoroughly, you-will-have every-reason to-look for-success. 
 
 I-shall expect to hear from-you fully a-week or- 00 more 
 in-advance of-your leaving home for Savannah. 
 
 When-you arrive in-this city, take a-hack and-tell the- 
 driver to take-you- 25 to-my home where you-will-be welcome 
 to-stay until you-are ready to-move into the-quarters which 
 we shall engage for-you- 50 in-advance. 
 
 Very sincerely-yours, 
 
 Orville Matteson. 257 
 
 12. Translation. 
 
joS PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON XXIX. 
 THE; N-HOOK, SEC. i. 
 
 1. The sound of n is, in certain cases, indicated by a 
 small final hook called the n-hook. It is similar to the 
 f-hook. This hook is used on all straight letters. It is 
 written opposite the s-circle side. The straight letters with 
 the n-hook modification are called pen, ben, ten, den, ken, 
 gen, etc. This hook may be used for an n when it follows 
 a straight stroke immediately or when a long or short vowel, 
 diphthong or coalescent intervenes. A medial n following 
 a straight letter may be represented by an n-hook even 
 though it may be in the syllable following the stroke which 
 the n-hook modifies, as in denote. 
 
 2. The use of the n-hook on straight letters is illustrated 
 by the following words : 
 
 \\ 3 3 J _ _ / S J 
 
 pain bone drain train Jane cone gain rain hen denote 
 
 3. The rules governing the use of the n-hook on straight 
 strokes are as follows : 
 
 1 i ) A medial n following a straight letter is represented 
 by the n-hook unless the stroke en may be more quickly 
 or easily written. 
 
 (2) When it is the last consonant in a word, an n fol- 
 lowing a straight letter is represented by the n-hook, if it 
 is the last letter in the word, or is followed by a silent vowel, 
 as in drain and cone. 
 
 (3) When n is the last consonant in a word and a sound- 
 ed vowel follows, the stroke en is used, as in tiny and deny. 
 
 (4) The n-hook may be indicated by placing an s-circle 
 
SHORTHAND 109 
 
 or a sez-circle on the n-hook side of straight letters as in 
 cadence. 
 
 4. The application of these rules is shown in the fol- 
 lowin illustrations : 
 
 L 
 
 tone tiny dun deny pain puny dense cadence 
 
 5. List Words. (62 1 140. ) 
 
 i Pain, 2 bin, 3 town, 4 down, 5 satin, 6 deepen, 7 cane, 
 8 chaplain, 9 grain, 10 boon, n kine, 12 plain, 13 blown, 
 14 plan, 15 glean, 16 clean, 17 clan, 18 cone, 19 gin, 20 de- 
 cline, 21 pagan, 22 candy. 23 dandy, 24 denote, 25 taken, 
 26 Ljgan, 27 strain, 28 sudden, 29 legion, 30 kitchen, 
 31 beacon, 32 unclean, 33 shaken, 34 pinch, 35 punch, 
 36 gainer, 37 glance, 38 bunch, 39 guns, 40 dines, 41 gains, 
 42 dunes, 43 chance, 44 chains, 45 joins, 46 quince, 47 trance, 
 48 bounce, 49 bones, 50 curtain, 51 twins, 52 spleen, 53 ob- 
 tain, 54 pretense, 55 prudence, 56 retains, 57 Hortense, 
 58 disdain, 59 residence, 60 brown, 61 green, 62 greens. 
 
 ^ 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 J s X. ""* \ - 
 
 at-once at-length again-and- benevolent begin beneficial begun 
 
 again benevolence 
 
 ^ 
 
 began darkens denominate darken doctrine determine experl- European 
 darkness denomination ence 
 
 > 
 
 for-in- question general happen it-will-have is-said In-hls- Imagine 
 stance generally twelve to-hav situation 
 
no PITMANIC 
 
 must-do must-come musl-give more-than magnificent Northwestern 
 
 magnificence 
 
 I 
 
 7. Phrases. (59 i :oo.) 
 
 i Come-at-once, 2 at-length-it-came, 3 he-is-benevolent, 
 4 begin-it, 5 it-was-begun, 6 the-day-darkens, 7 such-doc- 
 trine, 8 will-determine, 9 the-people's-government, 25 10 when- 
 it-happcns, n he-will-imagine, 12 both-must-come, 13 you- 
 must-give-up, 14 a-magnificent-day, 15 how-many-dances, 
 1 6 he-can-come, 17 a-large-cone, 50 18 take-his-chances, 
 19 a-mere-pretense, 20 took-a-quince. 59 
 
 8. Letter. (125 2:00.) 
 
 Adams, Massachusetts, April 6, 1904. 
 Mrs. Lillie Miley, 
 
 Decatur, 111. 
 Dear Mrs. Miley : 
 
 Replying to-your questions in-reference-to-the Ladies' 25 
 Aid^, Society branches. It-is-impossible for me to-give-you 
 any help. Since I-have-never belonged to the-society I- 
 know nothing of 50 the-society's plan of-work. I-think-that 
 if-you-would write Mrs. Ella Beach, of Denver, Colorado^ 
 you-will obtain answers to all-your 75 questions and-from 
 a-source that-is-reliable as Mrs. Beach is one-of the-chief 
 workers in-this society. I-am sorry that-my 100 inability to 
 answer-your questions will-make-it necessary for-you to 
 wait until-you-can hear from Mrs. Beach. 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Jennie Bolton. 125 
 
 9. Letter. (134 2:10.) 
 
 Clear Lake, Iowa, June 8, 1904. 
 Mr. Shelby Dixon, 
 
 Earlville, Mo. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-see from-yonr advertisement in-the Earlville 25 Globe, 
 
SHORTHAND in 
 
 that-you have- for sale a-number of-heavy work-horses. 
 I-expect soon to-begin work upon a-railroad job near Earl- 
 ville. As 50 I-now have but-one-team, it-will-be necessary 
 for-me to purchase several-more. If I-can secure-them in 
 Missouri as cheaply 75 as-they may-be had here, I-would 
 much prefer to buy-them there and-thus save the-expense 
 of shipping-them from this city. 100 Will-you, therefore, 
 please to-write-me at-once and-give age, weight and-prices 
 which-you ask for-your heavy teams. Your early reply 125 
 will-be an-especial favor. 
 
 Very-truly, 
 
 Enos Jackson. 134 
 10. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXX. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 (i) What sound, when it follows en, em and ray, 
 is sometimes indicated by a large initial hook? 
 
ii2 PITMANIC 
 
 (2) How does this hook compare in size with the 
 w-hook on these letters ? 
 
 (3) What is this hook .called? 
 
 (4) Give five words showing use of this hook. 
 
 (5) What vowels may occur between em, en and 
 ray and the following 1 indicated by the rel-hook? 
 
 (6) What large hook is used on lay? ^^ 
 
 (7) What is this hook called? 
 
 (8) Give three words in which this hook is used. 
 
 (9) By what names are the strokes modified by these 
 hooks called? 
 
 ( 10) Name the letters with which hay does not make 
 a distinct and easily formed angle? 
 
 (n) When the aspirate sound of h precedes these 
 letters by what character is it represented? 
 
 (12) How is this character written? 
 
 (13) In what direction must this tick for h always 
 be written? 
 
 (14) Give five words illustrating the use of this tick. 
 ^ (15) What sounds are represented by a small final 
 
 hook on the s-circle side of straight letters? 
 
 ( 16) Is this hook merely a modification of the stroke 
 or does it stand for the letter itself? 
 
 (17) What vowels may intervene between a straight 
 letter and a following f or v represented by the f-hook? 
 
 ( 18) Is it ever allowable to use the f-hook to indicate 
 an f or v in a syllable following that which contains the 
 stroke modified by the f-hook? 
 
 (19) When f or v comes between a straight letter 
 and a following stroke in the same word, when should the 
 hook and when should the stroke be used ? 
 
 (20) When an f or v is the last consonant in a word 
 
SHORTHAND 113 
 
 when should the stroke and when should the hook be used? 
 
 (21) Give three words where f is the last consonant 
 and the hook should be used. 
 
 (22) Give three words where f is the last consonant 
 and the stroke should be used. <* 
 
 (23) Give three words where v is the last consonant 
 and the hook should be used. 
 
 (24) Give three words where v is the last consonant 
 and the stroke should be used. 
 
 (25) What hook, similar to the f-hook, is used at 
 the end of straight letters, but on the side opposite the 
 f-hook? 
 
 v (26) What vowels may occur between a stroke and 
 i. following n-hook? 
 
 (27) May the n-hook ever be used to represent an 
 n in a syllable folowing the one containing the stroke modi- 
 fied by the n-hook? 
 
 (28) When n comes between two strokes in a word, 
 when should the n-hook and when should the stroke en 
 be used? 
 
 (29) When n is the last consonant in a word when 
 should the stroke and when should the hook be used? 
 
 (30) What is the effect of placing the s-circle or 
 sez-circle on the n-hook side of straight letters? 
 
 (31) Give five words in which the s-circle or sez- 
 circle is used on the n-hook side of straight letters. 
 
 EXERCISE 30. 
 
 2. List Words. (58 i :so.) 
 
 Journal railway analyze chronology barrel secular jocular 
 penalty Nelson millenium plural relate larynx Daniel Mal- 
 colm rolling whistle wheedle hecatomb whipple Higley howl 
 harmony holiday hexagonal- 5 graphic cough David groove 
 
n 4 PITMANIC 
 
 deserve braves heaves lithograph clef trough defense tough- 
 en cavil crave provincial satin blown decline pagan denote 
 taken strain legion gainer glance 50 chance joins quince 
 trance Hortense residence brown greens. 58 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 Only, unless, reliable, railway-car, relinquish, laws-of-life, 
 laws-of-health, everlasting, everlasting-life, ever-and-ever, 
 for-ever-and-ever, must-like, must-make, one-or-two, two- 
 or-three, three-or-four, most-important, must-expect, ought- 
 to-have, (it-ought-to-have,) which-have (whichever,) out- 
 of, (it-would-have,) which-ought-to-have, whatever, belief, 
 (believe,) perfect, poverty, careful, (carefully,) differ, (dif- 
 fered, different, difference,) derive, each- will-have, which- 
 will-have, much- will-have, govern, (governed, governor, 
 government,) at-once, at-length, again-and-again, benevo- 
 lent, (benevolence,) begin, beneficial, begun, began, darkens, 
 (darkness,) denominate, (denomination,) darken, doctrine, 
 determine, experience, European, for-instance, question, gen- 
 eral, (generally,) it- will-have, (twelve,) is-said-to-have, in- 
 his-situation, imagine, must-do, must-come, must-give, more- 
 than, magnificent, (magnificence,) Northwestern. 
 
 4. Phrases. (90 i :so.) 
 
 Release-them, their-camels, they-relate, you-will-realize, 
 autumnal-day, the-king's-realm, many-horses, two-hames, 
 hummingj-noises, in-harm's-way, several-hacks 23 all-holidays, 
 the-hill-top, raise-a-howl, pave-the-way, heavy-traffic, on- 
 the-reef, in-the-hive, some-lithographs-came, a-long-trough 50 
 a-new-incentive, strtve-to-succeed, each-will-have-enough, 
 come-at-once, at-length-it-came, he-is-benevolent, the-day- 
 darkens, will-determine, 73 he-will-imagine, a-magnificent- 
 day, take-his-chances, a-mere-pretense, took-a-quince. 90 
 
SHORTHAND 115 
 
 5. Letter. (100 1:40.) 
 
 Minneapolis, Minn., May 9, 1904. 
 Sears, Roebuck & Co., 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Sirs : 
 
 I-enclose eight dollars for which please to-ship me 25 
 the-following by-express; as-soon-as possible: 
 
 i No. 6 baby cab $3-OO 
 
 2. doz. No. 4 tooth brushes 2.25 r ' 
 
 i doz. 2 oz. tooth powder 2.25 
 
 i pair No. 2 lady's scissors .50 
 
 Total $8.00 
 
 I-shall look-for 75 these on Thursday. It-will-be necessary, 
 therefore, for-you to ship them the-same day yott-receive 
 this. I-ain, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Amos Benson. 100 
 6. Letter. (137 2:15.) 
 
 Newburgh, New-York, March 10, 1904. 
 Cole Bros., 
 
 Sioux Falls, South Dakota. 
 Dear-Sirs : 
 
 Replying to-your favor of March 8. 25 We-are sorry to 
 inform-you that-it- will-be impossible for us to ship-you any- 
 of the-smaller sizes of shoes inside of 50 two-weeks. Since 
 the-fourth of the-month calls have come from jobbers for- 
 several unusually large supplies, mostly of-children's shoes, 
 hence our-stock 75 of-small shoes is exceedingly low. We- 
 will rush the-work on-these sizes and-hope to-help-you out 
 in-time to-supply your 100 customers. Please-to inform us 
 what sizes you-require right-away and-we-will make a-rush 
 job of the-special sizes you-must-have. 125 
 
 Thanking-you for-your favor, we-are, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Higley & Co, 137 
 
ii6 PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON XXXI. 
 
 THE) N-HOOK, SEC. II. 
 
 a 
 
 1. In addition to the straight letters, the n-hook is also 
 used on all the curved letters, excepting zhe, way, yea and 
 ing. With the curved letters the n-hook is necessarily 
 written within the curve, the only side of curved letters upon 
 which a hook may be easily and quickly formed. 
 
 2. The curved letters with the n-hook modification are 
 designated as fen, ven, men, nen, etc. 
 
 3. When an s-circle follows an n-hook on a curved letter 
 the circle must be written within the hook, as in fence, 
 illustrated below. 
 
 4. The use of the n-hook is shown in the following 
 words : 
 
 I, 
 
 r 
 
 fancy vanish then aseign ozone meaning saloon fence 
 
 5. When n occurs in an outline between two consonant 
 strokes, either straight or curved, and the preceding is one 
 to which an n-hook may be attached, the hook is used in all 
 cases excepting where its use will not give an easily or 
 quickly formed outline or distinct angle with what follows. 
 In the word finch, for example, the stroke en is used. 
 Though requiring a longer outline, it is more quickly and 
 easily written than if the n-hook were used on the stroke 
 ex. Likewise in nonsense the n-hook should not be used. 
 
 6. The rules governing the use of an n-hook and the 
 strckc en in words where n is the last consonant, and also 
 the use of the n-hook to occasionally represent a medial n 
 in a syllable following the stroke modified by an n-hook 
 are the same for curved letters as those given in the pre- 
 
SHORTHAND 117 
 
 ceding lesson for the use of the n-hook on straight letters 
 except that an n-hook cannot be indicated on the curved 
 strokes, as is done on the straight letters, by putting the 
 s-circle on the n-hook side. 
 
 EXERCISE 31. 
 
 7. List Words. (60 i :2O.) 
 
 i Famine, 2. vain, 3 main, 4 fine, 5 ransom, 6 dining, 
 7 renown, 8 venom, 9 sunshine, 10 vanish, n finish, 12 van, 
 13 bean, 14 noun, 15 moon, 16 thinness, 17 leaner, 18 nun- 
 nery, 19 fencing, 20 lance, 2.1 earn, 22 finance, 23 lining, 
 24 ravine, 25 earthen, 26 machine, 27 Michigan, 28 Monday, 
 29 workman, 30 raven, 31 bench, 32 French, 33 almanac, 
 34 infancy, 35 noon, 36 examine, 37 violin, 38 Nathan, 
 39 dominion, 40 throne, 41 muslin, 42 lonesome, 43 Spanish, 
 44 specimen, 45 malign, 46 minute, 47 leaven, 48 lunch, 
 49 learn, 50 permanence, 51 Roman, 52 Benjamin, 53 dis- 
 pense, 54 dense, 55 resistance, 56 leans, 57 omen, 58 cle 
 ency, 59 changes, 60 finances. jf 
 
 8. Wordsigns. 
 
 Washington Western within who-have union upon-his try-to- 
 heathen whoever have 
 
 C f 
 
 set-off set- said- some- spoken such- religion rather- responsible 
 forth to-have one a-one than 
 
 J4 
 
 provi- providence punish-ed opinion organize over-and- our-own 
 dential punishment over-again 
 
 happen 
 
 4 
 
 17 
 
 _ 
 
 larger-than human human-life heaven every-one cross-examine 
 
ii8 PITMANIC 
 
 g. Phrases. (57 i :oo.) 
 
 i A-heathen, 2 within-hearing, 3 encroach-upon-his, 
 4 whatever-came, 5 will-try-to-have, 6 twelve-cases, 7 in- 
 his-religion, 8 rather-than-say-so, 9 a-responsible-man, 25 
 10 he-will-never-punish, n in-his-own-opinion, 12 they-may- 
 organize, 13 they-may-come-back, 14 larger-than-ever, 
 15 he-will-cross-examine, 16 he-was-human, 50 17 every-one- 
 saw-him, 18 in-heaven-above. 57 
 
 10. Letter. (160 2:40.) 
 
 "When-you write to~-your cousin in Kansas be-sure to- 
 tell-him to-take up the-study of-this very-brief way of-tak- 
 ing 2r> down what a-person says. I-know that-he-would en- 
 joy the-study and-if-he learns the-subject very thoroughly 
 it-will-be possible 50 for-him to-eanx fully twice as-much-as 
 he-is receiving as a-book -keeper where he-is-now at- work. 
 Young-people who know 75 how to-keep books and-also know 
 how to-run a-writing machine and-do amanuensis work are 
 always sure of-plenty to-do at 100 a-large salary. It-will 
 please-me to learn that-it-is possible for-you to persuade 
 him to-take up the-study of-this 125 new subject. If-he be- 
 comes a-pupil at-our school we-will do-everything possible 
 to assist him to-make a-success of-the-study. 150 I-believe he- 
 will have-no-difficulty in-doing so." 160 
 
 11. Letter. (130 2:10.) 
 
 Akron, Ohio, July 7, 1904. 
 Mr. John Robinson, 
 
 Jackson, Michigan. 
 My-Uear-Sir : 
 
 Since-thinking over what you said to-me Tuesday 25 I- 
 wrote to-my cousin James in Salina, Kansas, giving-him 
 the-substance of-your remarks. I-am very-sure it-will im- 
 press-him favorably. 50 As-soon-as he-has-had sufficient 
 time to-think the-subject over you- will very-likely hear- 
 
SHORTHAND 119 
 
 from-him as-he-is exceedingly anxious 75 to-make some 
 change looking to an-increase in salary. He believes that- 
 he-is capable of-earning more and-is willing to-do what- 
 ever 100 may-be necessary to-prepare for a-place that-will 
 bring-him a-larger income. T-am very-sure you-will hear- 
 from-him soon. 1 - 1 "' 
 
 Very sincerely-yours, 
 
 James Webb. 130 
 12. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXXII. 
 
 THI5 INITIAL N-HOOK. 
 
 i. When n is the first consonant in a word and it is 
 immediately followed by one of the triple consonants, iss- 
 ern or iss-lay and in a few other instances, as iss-fer, in 
 insufferable, the stroke en does not form a good angle or 
 is not easily joined to what follows. In such cases, what is 
 called the initial n-hook is made use of. This is a small 
 initial hook, about half the size of the s-circle, made just 
 before and on the opposite side of the stroke from the 
 
120 PITMANIC 
 
 s-circle which it always precedes. The words in which it 
 is necessary to apply this principle are not very numerous. 
 The student should, however, thoroughly familiarize him- 
 self with this hook in order that he may write it without 
 hesitation in the few instances in which it is necessary to 
 use it. The use of the initial-n-hook is shown in the fol- 
 lowin' words : 
 
 \ 
 
 Insoluble insole insuperable nasturtium unseemly inscribe 
 
 2. When a word begins with an initial-n-hook, it is 
 never phrased with a preceding word. 
 
 EXERCISE 32. ., 
 
 3. List Words. (31.; 150.) 
 
 i Enslave, 2 insoluble, 3 inscribe, 4 enslaving, 5 nastur- 
 tium, 6 insuperable, 7 inscribing, 8 unscrupulous, 9 insole, 
 10 insufferable, IT enslaver, 12 unscrupulousness, 13 un- 
 screw, 14 unseal, 15 unsealing, 16 unscrupulously, 17 insol- 
 ing, 18 unscrewing, 19 unsalable, 20 unsparing, 21 unspar- 
 ingly, 22 insoles, 23 insolvency, 24 unsolvable, 25 insomnia, 
 26 insolence, 27 insolidity, 28 enslavable, 29 unseemly, 30 un- 
 seemliness, 31 ensilage. 
 
 4. Wordsigns. 
 
 J ^ \ I 
 
 /L 
 
 in-his- in-some in-his- suspicion such- such- in-eeeminj: 
 
 usual experience would ought- 
 
 have to-have 
 
 I 
 
 in-ae- which- which- which- such- such- 
 
 many are-to were-to- would- are-to- were-tc 
 
 have have have have have 
 
SHORTHAND 121 
 
 5. Phrases. (61 i :oo.) 
 
 i In-his-usual-way, 2 in-his-usual-manner, 3 in-some- 
 manner, 4 in-some-way, 5 in-some-cases, 6 such-would-have- 
 come, 7 unseal-it, 8 enslave-them 25 9 in-some-difficulty, 
 10 unseemly-doings, n inscribe-his-name, 12 unseal-many- 
 cases, 13 unsealing-the-stock, 14 insolence-of-the-man, 
 15 unseemly-appearance, 16 unscrew-the-case, 17 insoluble- 
 substance, 50 18 ensilage-cases, 19 inscribing-a-riame, 20 en- 
 slave-many-people, 21 insoles-may-come. 61 
 
 6. Letter. (155 2:30.) 
 
 Kalamazoo, Mich., June 21, 1904. 
 Messrs. Thompson Bros., 
 
 Lincoln, Neb. 
 Sirs : 
 
 We-take the-liberty to-write-you in-reference-to 25 J. K. 
 Southworth, of Lincoln. He-asks us to ship him a-ton of- 
 our twine on thirty days'-time. It-is impossible for us 50 to 
 learn of-his financial rating from any-of the-commercial 
 firms with-which we-have dealings. We therefore write to- 
 you. We would like 70 very-much to-sell this-quantity of- 
 stock to Mr. Southworth, but feel that-we should-have some- 
 assurance that-he-is able and-would 100 be-likely to pay-for- 
 same as-soon-as it becomes due. Your early reply, with 
 the-knowledge you surely have of-his rating, will 125 help 
 us out-of our-difficulty. We-thank-you in-advance for the- 
 favor we-are sure to-receive from-you. We-are, 
 
 Yours-truly, 150 
 
 J. M. Belden & Son. 155 
 
 7. Letter. (136 2:15.) 
 
 Lincoln, Neb., June 24, 1904. 
 William Belden & Son, 
 
 Kalamazoo, Mich. 
 Dear-Sirs : 
 
 Replying to-your favor of June 2i. 2r> Will say that-we 
 
122 PITMANIC 
 
 know Mr. J. K. South worth very well. We-are doing-busi- 
 ness with-him every few-days so-that we know something 50 
 of-his-financial ability. We-believe you-will run no risk 
 whatever in-shipping Mr. Southworth the-stock of twine 
 which he desires, and-on 75 the-terms he-proposes. It-is-our 
 opinion that-when the-thirty days are up you-will have-the- 
 cash for-your stock. It-is 100 a-pleasure for us to-do-you 
 this favor for-we know Mr. Southworth is worthy of the- 
 high financial rating which we-are sure 125 you-will now 
 
 give-him. We-are, 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Thompson Bros. 130 
 8. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXXIII. 
 
 THE SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 i. The syllables represented by tion, sion, cion and 
 sometimes cian, usually coming at the end of words and 
 
SHORTHAND 123 
 
 always at the end of syllables, are represented by a large 
 final hook called the shun-hook. This hook is used on both 
 straight and curved letters. Like all hooks with the curved 
 letters it is written within the curve. With the straight 
 letters it is written on the s-circle side. The shun-hook 
 may be used when either a long or short vowel, diphthong 
 or coalescent comes between the hook and the preceding 
 stroke. Care should be taken not to confuse it 
 with the f or n-hook. When the s-circle follows the shun- 
 hook it should be written within the hook. The use of 
 the shun-hook is shown as follows : 
 
 As 
 
 petition revisions exceptional violation impression education lotion 
 
 EXERCISE 33. 
 
 Using the shun-hook write : 
 2. List Words. (60 1 125.) 
 
 i Nation, 2 relation, 3 animation, 4 portion, 5 dissension, 
 6 emigration, 7 invocation, 8 intimation, 9 exception, 10 oc- 
 cupation, ii allusion, 12 probation, 13 option, 14 caution, 
 15 logician, 16 diction, 17 reaction, 18 station, 19 sedition, 
 20 section, 21 fiction, 22 legation, 23 passionate, 24 rational, 
 25 dictionary, 26 sectional, 27 occupations, 28 locations, 
 29 implications, 30 adoption, 31 dissolution, 32 submission, 
 33 mission, 34 ammunition, 35 creation, 36 dimension, 
 37 restoration, 38 division, 39 evolution, 40 progression, 
 41 inflammation, 42 prevention, 43 isolation, 44 nutrition, 
 45 assertion, 46 attention, 47 plantation, 48 definition, 49 in- 
 duction, 50 elevation, 51 execution, 52 intimation, 53 repu- 
 tation, 54 omission, 55 edition, 56 digression, 57 invasion, 
 58 emulation, 59 persecution, 60 erection. 
 
124 PITMANIC 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 connection confession cross- dissatis- destruction deliberation 
 
 examination faction 
 
 examination explanation expression generation consideration in-his- 
 
 description 
 
 V ^ A 
 
 invention information operation oppression objec- perfec- represen- reduc- 
 
 tion lion tation tion 
 
 \ 
 
 u 
 
 reformation revela- revolution signifi- in-his- determination inclination 
 tion cation expression 
 
 4. Phrases. (59 i :oo.) 
 
 i In-this-connection, 2 hear-his-motion, 3 a-long-cross- 
 examination, 4 in-his-generation, 5 a-terrible-revelation, 
 6 in-his-inclination, 7 secure-his-invention, 8 make-some-re- 
 duction, 23 9 will-make-objection, 10 the-wrong-dimension, 
 ii no-signification, 12 make-no-admission, 13 take-no-action, 
 14 on-the-occasion, 15 give-you-attention, 16 an-elevation, 
 17 a-poor-representation, 50 18 in-your-mission, 19 in-that- 
 section, 20 a-new-dictionary/' 9 
 
 5. Letter. (130 2:10.) 
 
 Franklin, Kansas, Feb. n, 1904. 
 Ferry & Co., 
 
 Wayne, Michigan. 
 Sirs : 
 
 Your Mr. Nichols was-in-this city a-week ago 25 and-I- 
 gave-him notice that I-must-have a-much-larger supply of- 
 
SHORTHAND 125 
 
 seed than I-had a-year-ago. T-spoke to-him 50 in-reference- 
 to the-extras to ship with the-ustial supply. I-now see that- 
 it-\vill-be necessary for-me to increase the-supply 75 very 
 largely, therefore please to-delay shipping until-you hear 
 from me again at which time I-will enumerate all the-sup- 
 plies I-can use 100 this-year. I-hope this-will reach-you in- 
 plenty of-time, that-is, before-you ship the-seed for-which- 
 you already have instructions. 1 " 
 
 Yours-very-truly, 
 
 Thomas Kane. 130 
 
 6. Letter. (751:15.) 
 
 Des Moines, Iowa, March i, 1904. 
 William Ball, 
 
 Delhi Mills, Michigan. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 Will-you please to-mail to my address 25 at-once whatever 
 circulars you-may have giving a-description of-your fine 
 wool sheep. I-am expecting to purchase a-large number 
 of-that 50 variety of sheep this spring. If-your sheep are 
 such and-the-price reasonably low, you-will hear-from-me 
 again soon. Yours, 
 
 Samuel Ellsworth. 75 
 
 7. Translation. 
 
PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON XXXIV. 
 
 THE S-SHUN-HOOK. 
 
 i. When the syllable represented by the shun-hook is 
 preceded by the sound of s or z, it would be necessary to 
 use the stroke es or ze, if the usual form of the shun-hook 
 were used. By making use of what is called the s-shun- 
 hook it is possible to use the circle iss for s or z and also 
 use a hook to represent the syllables tion, cion, sion, etc. 
 This hook is formed, after writing the s-circle, by crossing 
 the stroke to which the s-circle is joined and forming a 
 small hook half the size of the s-circle on the opposite side. 
 When an s or z follows the s-shun-hook it is represented 
 by an s-circle written within this hook. This hook is used 
 only for a final shun in a word and is never joined to a 
 following character except an s-circle, as shown in the word 
 vexations, except in a few words like sensational and 
 suppositional. The s-shun-hook may be written on the 
 s-circle side when the circle preceding is written on the 
 n-hook side of straight letters to indicate an n. 
 
 The use of the s-shun-hook is illustrated in the following 
 words : 
 
 ~A-- V- _.i*_ _J_ L c i_ 
 
 decision procession physician transition vexations cessation 
 
 EXERCISE 34. 
 2. List Words. (30 -50.) 
 
 i Position, 2 proposition, 3 decision, 4 possession, 5 in- 
 cision, 6 pulsation, 7 exposition, 8 deposition, 9 vexation, 
 10 succession, n acquisition, 12 cessation, 13 imposition, 
 14 supposition, 15 disposition, 16 procession, 17 positions, 
 
SHORTHAND 127 
 
 18 transitions, 19 expositions, 20 sensation, 21 propositions, 
 22 decisions, 23 physicians, 24 pulsations, 25 depositions, 
 26 acquisitions, 27 sensations, 28 causation, 29 musician, 
 30 suppositions. 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 / 
 
 circumstances- in-response-to just-what just-been just-come 
 
 of-the-case 
 
 4. Phrases. (57 rss.) 
 
 i In-his-position, 2 they-sanction, 3 what-does-it-signify, 
 4 a-new-action, 5 a- wrong-decision, 6 cause-vexation, 
 7 many-vexations, 8 such-a-supposition, 9 saw-many-expo- 
 sitions, 25 10 the-new-physician. n like-his-disposition, 12 a- 
 miserable-sensation, 13 he-was-a-musician, 14 on-that-sup- 
 position, 15 gave-many-decisions, 16 will-take-his-position, 
 17 several-positions, 50 18 it-was-an-imposition, 19 a-peculiar- 
 decision. 57 
 
 5. Letter. (1632:35.) 
 
 "When the-pupil has come to-this lesson he or she should- 
 feel that-this subject is really very-much easier than he-had 
 expected 25 when-he-began. All-that-is really necessary for 
 any-boy or girl with the-average capacity is-a-determination 
 to-keep at the-study 50 and-he-will succeed in-due time. Too- 
 many beginners seem to-overlook the-special-importance 
 of learning every principle thoroughly. Especially is-this 
 true 75 in-the-very beginning of the-study of-this important 
 subject. It-is too often the-case that the-pupil desires to- 
 go ahead before 100 he-has given nearly enough time to and- 
 careful study of the-early lessons of-this-book. Everything 
 which follows these early lessons embodies, 125 in-some-way 
 or-other, the-use of the-simple characters which-are-given 
 in the-early lessons of the-book. If-you study them 150 very 
 
128 PITMANIC 
 
 thoroughly you-will in-time derive much advantage from 
 having done-so." 103 
 6. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXXV. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 (1) On which curved letters is the n-hook used? 
 
 (2) Where is the s-circle written when it follows an 
 n-hook upon a curved letter? 
 
 (3) What is the initial-n-hook? 
 
 (4) When should this hook be used? 
 
 (5) Before what combinations of consonants is this 
 hook most frequently used ? 
 
 (6) Is this hook of frequent use? 
 
 I (7) What final syllables are represented by a large 
 final hook within curves and on the s-circle side of straight 
 strokes ? r 
 
 (8) May any vowel occur between a stroke and a 
 following shim-hook? 
 
SHORTHAND 129 
 
 (9) Where is the s-circle written when it follows the 
 shun-hook? 
 
 ( 10) When an s-circle immediately precedes a sylla- 
 ble represented by a shun-hook, how is this hook written? 
 
 ( 1 1 ) When an s follows a syllable represented by 
 the s-shun-hook, how is the s written ? 
 
 EXERCISE 35. 
 
 2. List Words. (47 1:10.) 
 
 Ransom sunshine van nunnery earthen machine Michigan 
 workman raven French infancy enslave inscribe enslaver 
 unscrupulous unseal inscribing unsparing insole insolvency 
 insomnia enslavable unseemliness relation occupation 23 allu- 
 sion reaction legation submission restoration elevation di- 
 gression erection position possession vexation succession 
 cessation supposition transitions expositions physicians pul- 
 sations depositions acquisitions sensations musician. 47 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 Washington, Western, within, (heathen,) who-have, 
 (whoever,) union, upon-his, try-to-have, set-off, set-forth, 
 said-to-have, some-one, spoken, such-a-one, religion, rather- 
 than, responsible, providential, providence, punish, (pun- 
 ished, punishment, happen,) opinion, organize, over-and- 
 over-again, our-own, larger-than, human, human-life, 
 heaven, every-one, cross-examine, in-his-usual, in-some, in- 
 his-experience, suspicion, such-would-have, such-ought-to- 
 have, in-seeming, in-as-many, which-are-to-have, which- 
 were-to-have, which-would-have, such-are-to-have, such- 
 \vere-to-have, connection, confession, cross-examination, 
 dissatisfaction, destruction, deliberation, examination, 
 explanation, expression, generation, consideration, 
 in-his-description, invention, information, operation, 
 oppression, objection, perfection, representation, reduction, 
 
130 PITMANIC 
 
 reformation, revelation, revolution, signification, in-his-ex- 
 prcssion, determination, inclination, circumstances-of-the- 
 case, in-response-to, just- what, just-been, just-come. 
 
 4. Phrases. (126 2:00.) 
 
 Encroach-upon-his rather-than-say-s@ he-will-never-pun- 
 ish in-his-own-opinion they-may-come-back he-was-human 
 in-heaven-above 25 in-his-usual-way in-some-manner in-some- 
 way enslave-them unsealing-the-stock unseemly-appearance 
 insolence-of-the-man insoluble-substance ensilage-cases 50 
 inscribing-a-name insoles-may-come in-connection a-long- 
 cross-examination will-make-objection . wrong-dimension 
 no-signification make-no-admission take-no-action 75 on-the- 
 occasion give-you-attention an-elevation a-poor-representa- 
 tion in-your-mission in-that-section a-new-dictionary in-his- 
 position they-sanction 100 what-does-it-signify many- vexa- 
 tions such-a-supposition a-miserable-sensation he-was-a-mu- 
 sician gave-many-decisions will-take-a-position a-peculiar- 
 decision. 126 
 
 5. Letter. (160 2:40.) 
 
 "When-you write to-your cousin in Kansas be-sure to- 
 tell-him to-take up the-study of-this very-brief way of-tak- 
 ing 25 down what a-person says. I-know that-he-would en- 
 joy the-study and-if-he learns the-subject very thoroughly 
 it-will-be possible 50 for-him to-earn fully twice as-much-as 
 he-is receiving as a-book-keeper where he-is-now at-work. 
 Young-people who know 75 how to-keep books and-also know 
 how to-run a-writing machine and-do amanuensis work 
 are always sure of-plenty to-do at 100 a-large salary. It-will 
 please-me to learn that-it-is possible for-you to persuade him 
 to-take up the-study of-this 125 new subject. If-he becomes 
 a-pupil at-our school we-will do-everything possible to as- 
 sist him to-make a-success of-the-study. 150 I-believe he- 
 will have-no-difficulty in-doing so." 100 
 
SHORTHAND 131 
 
 6. Letter. (136 2:15.) 
 
 Lincoln, Neb., June 24, 1904. 
 William Belden & Son, 
 
 Kalamazoo, Mich. 
 Dear-Sirs : 
 
 Replying to-your favor of June 2i. 25 Will say that- we 
 know Mr. J. K. Seuthworth very well. We-are doing-busi- 
 ness with-him every few-days so-that we know something""'" 
 of-his-financial ability". We-believe you-will run no risk 
 whatever in-shipping Mr. Southworth the-stock of twine 
 which he desires, and-on 75 the-terms he-proposes. It-is-our 
 opinion that-when the-thirty days are up you-will have-the- 
 cash for-your stock. It-is 100 a-pleasure for us to-do-you 
 this favor for-we know Mr.' Southworth is worthy of the- 
 high financial rating which we-are sure 125 you-will now 
 give-him. We-are, 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Thompson Bros. 136 
 
 7. Letter. (751:15.) 
 
 Des Moines, Iowa, March i, 1904. 
 William Ball, 
 
 Delhi Mills, Michigan. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 Will-you please to-mail to my address 25 at-once whatever 
 circulars you-may have giving a-description of-your fine 
 wool sheep. I-am expecting to purchase a-large number 
 of-that 50 variety of sheep this spring. If-your sheep are 
 such and-the-price reasonably low, you-will hear-from-me 
 again soon. Yours, 
 
 Samuel Ellsworth. 75 
 
 8. Letter. (1632:35.) 
 
 "When the-pupil has come to-this lesson he or she should- 
 fecl that-this subject is really very-much easier than he-had. 
 
132 PITMANIC 
 
 expected 25 when-he-began. All-that-is really necessary for 
 any-boy or girl with the-average capacity is-a-cletermination 
 to-keep at the-study 50 and-he-will succeed in-due time. Too- 
 many beginners seem to-overlook the-special-importance 
 of learning every principle thoroughly. Especially is-this 
 true 73 in-the-very beginning of the-study of-this important 
 subject. It-is too often the-case that the-pupil desires to- 
 go ahead before 100 he-has given nearly enough time to and- 
 careful study of the-early lessons of-this-book. Everything 
 which follows these early lessons embodies, 125 in-some-way 
 or-other, the-use of the-simple characters which-are-given 
 in the-early lessons of the-book. If-you study them 150 very 
 thoroughly you-will in-time derive much advantage from 
 having done-so." 183 
 
 LESSON XXXVI. 
 
 THF, TIV-HOOK. 
 
 1. A large final hook called the tiv-hook, written on 
 the n-hook side of straight letters, represents the frequently 
 occurring combination tv, as in active, captive, talkative. 
 A long or short vowel or diphthong may intervene between 
 the tiv-hook and the stroke to which it is joined. 
 
 2. This hook is, as a rule, used only when the sounds 
 of the letters tv are in the same syllable. It is, however, 
 sometimes allowable to use the tiv-hook for a t in a syllable 
 preceding the one in which the v occurs. This is permissi- 
 ble where the two syllables closely mingle, as in active, 
 divided thus, act-ive, but written kay-tiv. When an s 
 follows the tiv-hook, it is written within the hook, as in 
 operatives. 
 
SHORTHAND 133 
 
 3. Care should be exercised to make this hook fully 
 as large as the shun-hook in order to avoid its being con- 
 fused with the n-hook. 
 
 The use of the tiv-hook is shown in the following words: 
 
 _ 
 
 effective active captive talkative operatives 
 
 EXERCISE 36. 
 
 4. List Words. (30 145. ) 
 Using the tiv-hook write : 
 
 i Dative, 2 detective, 3 active, 4 talkative, 5 actively, 
 6 operative, 7 adjective, 8 receptive, 9 receptively, 10 cap- 
 tivity, IT expletive, 12 corrective, 13- ineffective, 14 fugi* 
 tive, 15 indicative, 16 respectively, 17 creative, 18 elective, 
 19 executive, 20 imitative, 21 negative, 22 illustrative, 
 23 instructive, 24 negatives, 25 operatives, 26 prerogative, 
 27 curative, 28 protective, 29 detectives, 30 deceptive. 
 
 5. Wordsigns. 
 
 subjective descriptive connective collective reflective figurative 
 
 collectively reflectively figuratively 
 
 \ 
 
 legislative consecutive inductive objective herein 
 
 consecutively inductively objectively 
 
 6. Phrases. (50 :45.) 
 
 i He-was-subjective, 2 a-descriptive-case, 3 collective-as- 
 sembly, 4 was-reflective, 5 spoke-figuratively, 6 legislative- 
 affairs, 7 a-consecutive-case, 8 reason-is-inductive, 9 was- 
 the-dative, 10 such-talkativeness, 25 n a-new-adjective, 
 12 it-is-indicative, 13 creative-power, 14 executive-days, 
 
134 PITMANIC 
 
 15 elective-officers, 16 he-is-elective, 17 very-imitative, 
 18 in-his-active-way, 19 he-was-the-operative. 50 
 
 7. Letter. (94 i :so.) 
 
 Dayton, Ohio, May 7, 1904. 
 John Loomis, 
 
 Milan, Mich. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 On Friday I-delivered to the-express company six-cases 25 
 of paper. These-should have-been in Milan on Saturday. 
 I-am-sure there is something wrong. The-delay is likely 
 due to-carelessness of 50 the-express-men. I-presume it-will 
 take several-days to-trace the-package. I-shall have the- 
 company trace-it at-once. Should-you 78 fail to-receive the- 
 stock within a-few days, be-sure to-write again. 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Moore Brothers. 04 
 
 S. Letter. (125 2:00.) 
 
 Tecumseh, Mich., May n, 1904. 
 
 New Boston Hotel, 
 
 Boston, Mass. 
 Dear-Sirs : 
 
 When-I-was at-your Ocean Beach House near 25 Boston 
 two-weeks ago I-came away in-a-hurry in-response-to a- 
 telegram to-look up a-very-important-sale at-this place. 50 
 I-have-been too busy to-write-you before this. I-have-been 
 fearful that you would begin to-think I-was trying to es- 
 cape 75 my bill at-your house. I-hope the-check herein will 
 relieve you of any-such feeling, if-you have-been harboring 
 such an-idea. 100 I rather expect to-be with you-again in-a- 
 few months. Please to-acknowledge receipt of the-check I- 
 enclose. Truly-yours, 
 
 Peter Cooper. 125 
 
SHORTHAND 135 
 
 g. Letter. (125 2:00.) 
 
 Chelsea, Mich., April 12, 1904. 
 Digby Harness Co., 
 
 Chicago, 111. 
 Sirs : 
 
 Will-you please-to explain why I-fail to-receive 25 the-four 
 sets of-carriage harness and-the-set of-heavy farm harness 
 for-which I-gave you my check in-person when-in Chicago 50 
 on March 27? You said-that-you would-require but two- 
 days to-havc all of-them ready and-that you-would ship 
 same 75 by-express. It-has-now been more-than two-weeks 
 and-my customers are-in a-hurry for-them. I- will lose all- 
 five sales 100 unless thc-harness reach-here within a- very few 
 days. Please to-give this-your early attention. I-am, 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Isaac Blake, 
 
 10. Translation. 
 
 ~3-\ 
 
136 PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON XXXVII. 
 
 THE ST-LOOP. 
 
 1. The consonant sounds of st, sd and zd very frequently 
 occur at the beginning or end of a syllable without an inter- 
 vening sounded vowel. In such cases the two are generally 
 represented by elongating the s-circle, forming what is call- 
 ed the st-loop. It is the same width as the s-circle and 
 about one-half the length of the stroke to which it is joined. 
 Sometimes, though rarely, the st-loop is used to represent 
 an s or z at the end of one syllable and a t or d at the begin- 
 ning of the following syllable, as in gesticulation. When 
 used on straight letters the st-loop is written on the s-circle 
 side, except in cases where it is desired to indicate the n- 
 hook by placing the loop on the n-hook side of straight let- 
 ters, as in against. On curved letters the loop is written 
 within the curve. 
 
 2. When an s or z follows the loop it is written across 
 the stroke at the end of the st-loop, as in rests. 
 
 3. The st-loop is not used when st, sd or zd occur at 
 the end of the first or of a medial stroke and the balance of 
 the word would require one to cross the stroke to which 
 the st-loop is attached, and make a following stroke on the 
 opposite side. For example, the word vestige is not writ- 
 ten ve-st-jay, but rather ve-iss-te-jay. The reason for this 
 is that in rapid writing the tendency would be to broaden 
 the st-loop so much, if thus used, that it would be mistaken 
 for a sez-circle and thus lead to confusion in reading. This 
 tendency has in a measure been overcome by shortening the 
 st-loop into an s-circle and forming Wordsigns for the more 
 commonly occurring words where the st-loop would nat- 
 urally come and would be followed by a stroke on the oppo- 
 
SHORTHAND 137 
 
 site side. This is shown in such Wordsigns as mostly, 
 postoffice, etc. The st-loop is not used when the t or d 
 is the last consonant in a word and has a sounded vowel 
 following it, as in tasty, written te-iss-te. 
 
 The use of the st-loop is shown by the following words : 
 
 
 
 ->! 
 
 7 
 
 past fast rests investing star razed gesticula- lasting against 
 
 tion 
 
 EXERCISE 37. 
 
 Using the st-loop write : 
 
 4. List Words. (58 1:15.) 
 
 i Best, 2 breast, 3 blast, 4 blasting, 5 cast, 6 crest, 7 dust, 
 8 fast, 9 infest, 10 feasting, n chaste, 12 roast, 13 ghost, 
 14 zest, 15 mist, 16 protest, 17 honest, 18 forced, 19 drug- 
 gist, 20 forest, 21 justify, 22 investigation, 23 text, 24 vex- 
 ed, 25 manifest, 26 chastised, 27 abused, 28 steel, 29 hosts, 
 30 mists, 31 raised, 32 staff, 33 utmost, 34 majestic, 35 elas^- 
 tic, 36 reposed, 37 danced, 38 advised, 39 professed, 40 des- 
 tiny, 41 voiced, 42 pleased, 43 waste, 44 glazed, 45 accused, 
 46 perused, 47 foist, 48 west, 49 mast, 50 against, 51 pro- 
 posed, 52 bounced, 53 noised, 54 yeast, 55 rejoiced, 56 boast- 
 ing, 57 incrust, 58 statistics. 
 
 5. Wordsigns. 
 
 V^ 
 
 we-must six-or- tempta- stenography one-of one-of first next next- 
 seven tion stenographer the-best the-most time 
 
 stenographic 
 
 6. Phrases. (62 i :oo.) 
 
 i We-must-do, 2 take-one-or-two, 3 he-will-take-one-or- 
 two, 4 two-or-three-cases, 5 six-or-seven-machines, 6 five-or- 
 six-days, 2r> 7 resist-the-temptation, 8 stenographic-work, 
 
138 PITMANIC 
 
 9 they-receive-money, 10 one-of-the-best-cases, n took-one- 
 of-the-most, 12 he-has- just-come, 13 the-next-time, 50 14 must- 
 expect-many-cases, 15 you-come-next, 16 he-was-accused, 
 17 they-rejoiced. 62 
 
 7. Letter. (177 3:00.) 
 
 Lansing, Mich., May n, 1900. 
 Hon. Wm. McKinley, 
 
 Executive Mansion, 
 
 Washington, D. C. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-am in receipt of 25 information from Hon. J. C. Bur- 
 roughs, member of-the U.-S. senate from this state, to the- 
 effect that the-petition in-favor of Thomas 50 Burke, as rep- 
 resentative at Rome, has your approval. It-pleases me very- 
 much to hear-this for I-know-that Mr. Burke has ample 
 ability 75 to fulfil the-cluties of-such an-office. I-feel pleased 
 at the-outcome of-my work for Mr. Burke, for, as-you 
 well know, 100 I-was the-first one -to propose his name for that- 
 place. I-was very well-aware that if-your spare time would 
 allow you 125 to-look-into the-question of Mr. Burke's qualifi- 
 cations for-the-place you- would have-no objection to select- 
 ing him for so-important a-station. 150 T-desire to-assure-you 
 that-he-will do honor to thVhigh-position in-which you have 
 placed him. I-am, 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Wm. 175 Alden Smith. 177 
 
 8. Letter. (121 2:00.) 
 
 Lexington, Ky., Nov. 22, 1900. 
 Col. James Otis, 
 
 Nashville, Tenn. 
 My-Dear-Colonel : 
 
 I-have your favor of the-tenth. Your 25 plan to push vig- 
 orously the-petition in-favor of General Ashton for the- 
 
SHORTHAND 139 
 
 office of U.-S. Marshal for the-next term has my-approval. 50 
 The-general deserves the-honor and-it-is-my sincere hope 
 that both-members of the-senate from-your state will-do 
 everything possible to 75 induce Mr. McKinley to-select Gen. 
 Ashton. I-am at-your service if-there is anything I-can-do 
 to-aid you in-his-behalf. 100 Be-sure to-write-me if-you see 
 wherein I-can assist-you in-any-manner-whatever. 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Thomas Eaton. 121 
 9. Translation. 
 
 r 
 
 LESSON XXXVIII. 
 
 THE StR-LOOP. 
 
 i. A loop the same length as the st-loop, but fully twice 
 as wide at the center, is used to represent the consonants 
 str and is called the str-loop. Usually all three of the 
 sounds represented by the str-loop occur in one syllable, 
 either at the beginning or end. However, s may occur at 
 the end of one syllable and tr at the beginning of the next, 
 as in register, or st may come at the end of one and r at 
 
140 PITMANIC 
 
 the beginning of the next, as in poster. 
 
 2. The str-loop is used on both straight and curved 
 letters. If the letters str are the last consonants in a word 
 and a sounded vowel follows, as in vestry, the str-loop is 
 not used. If an s follows the str-loop it is represented by 
 crossing the stroke at the end of the loop and writing an 
 s-circle on the opposite side of the letter from the str-loop, 
 as in ministers, shown below. If one of the endings tion, 
 sion, or cion follows the str-loop, it is represented by cross- 
 ing the stroke at the end of the str-loop and forming the 
 s-shun-hook, as in demonstration, shown below. 
 
 3. The str-loop may be written on the n-hook side of 
 straight letters to indicate an n as in the word punster. 
 
 4. Some teachers advise that the st-loop and the str- 
 loop should not be used at the beginning of a stroke, as in 
 the word stale, written st-loop-lay, or in strong, written 
 str-loop-ing. It is claimed that it is awkward and retards 
 one's speed to so use these loops. We cannot agree ' with 
 this idea and recommend the use of these loops at the be- 
 ginning as well as at the end of consonant strokes. 
 
 5. Care should be taken to form this loop fully twice 
 as wide, or even wider, at the middle, than the st-loop so 
 that it will not be confused with that loop. 
 
 6. The str-loop, like the st-loop, is not used if str are 
 the last consonants in a word and a sounded vowel follows, 
 as in pastry, written pe-iss-ter. 
 
 The use of the str-loop is shown in the following words : 
 
 \> ^ ^-^ \ U^, 
 
 boaster plaster ministers punster demonstration strength 
 
 EXERCISE 38. 
 Using the str-loop write the following words: 
 
SHORTHAND 141 
 
 7. List Words. (45 i :oo.) 
 
 i Master, 2 faster, 3 luster, 4 roaster, 5 bluster, 6 cluster, 
 7 spinster, 8 poster, 9 bolster, 10 dexter, n rooster, 12 sinis- 
 ter. 13 cluster, 14 posters, 15 register. 16 strangle, 17 strong, 
 1 8 administer, 19 strange, 20 stranger, 21 illustration, 22 ob- 
 struction, 23 songster, 24 tester, 25 gamester, 26 fosters, 
 27 administers. 28 casters, 29 f casters, 30 jester, 31 pastor, 
 32 blister, 33 fester, 34 coaster, 35 dusters, 36 clusters, 
 37 strung, 38 strings, 39 demonstration, 40 disaster, 41 dis- 
 asters, 42 coasters, 43 toaster, 44 Brewster, 45 twister. 
 
 8. Wordsigns. 
 
 1 j 
 
 at- at-the- Baptist by-the- by-way-of- constitution-of- circumstance 
 first first first illustration. the-United- circumstances 
 
 States 
 
 _ V^ 
 
 denomina- deliver- extra- for-the- from-first- mystery Northwest 
 
 tional ance ordinary first-time to-last 
 
 g. Phrases. (61 i :oo.) 
 
 i A-ne\v -tester, 2 a-new-duster, 3 purchase-toasters, 4 he- 
 \vas-pastor, 5 I-broke-the-caster, 6 several-disasters, 7 pick-a- 
 cluster, 8 i:sc-thc-(!r.ter, 9 your-plaster,- r> 10 causc-a-blistcr, 
 ii he- will-administer, 12 he-was-a-gamester, 13 examine- 
 the-register, 14 a-large-rooster, 15 he-was-master, 16 will- 
 add-luster, 17 make-a-bluster, 18 a-large-poster, 19 the- 
 obstruction, 20 has-much-luster, 21 was-a- jester. 01 
 
 10. Letter. (189 3:05.) 
 
 Ann Arbor, Mich., June i, 1904. 
 Mr. Jerome Freeman, 
 
 Mason, Michigan. 
 My-Dear-Sir: 
 
 I-hear that-you-expect soon to-employ- 5 one-or-two more 
 
142 PITMANIC 
 
 stenographers in-your factory. If-I-am correct in-this, I- 
 clesirc to-make application for a-position with-your com- 
 pany. 50 I-have taken a-course at the-school here and-can- 
 now take dictation at a-rate which-would enable-me to-do 
 your work 75 in-a-manner satisfactory to-you. I-am willing 
 to begin at a-low rate and-continue at a-small salary until 
 I-shall prove 100 to-you that-my services are worth more. 
 I-can come at any-time. I-enclose a-number of-testimonials 
 and-can furnish as-many 125 more as-you-may desire as-to- 
 character and-ability as-an-amanuensis. Ail-that I-wish to- 
 begin with is-a-chance to show 150 what I-can-do and-what 
 I-am worth to an-employer. I-hope that-you may have a- 
 place for-me in a-very 175 few-days. I-shall await your 
 reply with-much anxiety. 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Thomas Worden. 189 
 
 ii. Letter. (188 3:05.) 
 
 Homer, Mich., April 22, 1904. 
 William Dickerson, 
 
 Dayton, Ohio. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 This morning I-noticed your advertisement in-the Toledo 25 
 Bee stating that-you desire to-employ a-traveling man for- 
 this section of Michigan. I-write for-more information on 
 the-subject. I-desire 50 such a-position and-am sure that-my 
 experience has-been such that I-can give you perfect satis- 
 faction in case the-work is-such 75 that I-can manage it. I- 
 judge from trie-brief mention in the-advertisement that-you 
 desire some one to take general charge of-your 100 agencies 
 in-this vicinity. It-is because I-have ability to-do just this- 
 class of-work that I-write you to-make application for 125 the- 
 job. I-shall be-pleased to answer any-questions you-may 
 
SHORTHAND 143 
 
 wish to ask or to furnish any references you desire. I-am 
 sure 150 that if-you will-only give-me a-trial you-will be well- 
 pleased with the-manner in-which I-shall do my-work. 
 Please 175 to-reply at an-early day and-oblige. 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Linus Galpin. 188 
 12. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XXXIX. 
 
 DOUBLE LENGTH LETTERS. 
 
 1. Any curved letter may be writen double length for 
 the purpose of indicating certain following sounds. 
 
 (1) Emp, written double length, adds an r, as in 
 damper. 
 
 (2) Ing lengthened adds kr or gr, as in anchor or 
 anger. 
 
 (3) Any other curved letter written double length adds 
 either tr, dr or thr. 
 
 2. These added letters may be in the same syllable with 
 the stroke that is lengthened or in a following syllable. 
 
144 PITMANIC 
 
 3. It is advisable for the beginner to write lengthened 
 letters a little more than double the usual length so as to 
 avoid all danger of confusing them with medium length 
 letters. 
 
 4. It is not allowable to use the lengthened stroke when 
 the letters indicated by lengthening are the last consonants 
 in the word and a sounded vowel follows, as in the word 
 angry, which should be written ing-ger. The application 
 of the double length letters is shown in the following words : 
 
 damper leather anchor further another flutter order murder 
 
 5. Any curved letter may be made double length to 
 indicate a following there, their, or other. 
 
 EXERCISE 39. 
 
 Applying the double length principle, write the following 
 words : 
 
 6. List Words. (60 1:15.) 
 
 i Lumber, 2 thunder, 3 blunder, 4 anger, 5 tamper, 6 cyl- 
 inder, 7 banker, 8 hunger, 9 surrender, 10 legislator, n an- 
 other, 12 literal, 13 re-enter, 14 murder, 15 reporter, 16 slan- 
 der, 17 slumber, 18 encumber, 19 finger, 20 maternal, 21 ec- 
 centric, 22 diameter, 23 render, 24 wonder, 25 central, 26 en- 
 tirely, 27 yonder, 28 thermometer, 29 Anderson, 30 scamper, 
 31 eastern, 32 stronger, 33 swifter, 34 swelter, 35 hanker, 
 36 timbers, 37 letter, 38 tender, 39 sender, 40 lender, 41 Al- 
 exander, 42 promoter, 43 smother, 44 neither, 45 calendar, 
 46 flinders, 47 welter, 48 ladder, 49 smatter, 50 meter, 
 51 motor, 52 feather, 53 hinder, 54 tinker, 55 cimeter, 
 56 letters, 57 amber, 58 chamber, 59 linger, 60 clinker. 
 
SHORTHAND 145 
 
 7. Wordsigns. 
 
 /r J7 ( y ^ g *> 
 
 _z -\7~ 
 
 later-than another-one of-their no-other some-other the-other 
 
 the-other-one longer-than any-other some-other-one 
 
 8. Phrases. (59 i :oo.) 
 
 i Was-later-than, 2 he-was-later-than, 3 have-another- 
 one, 4 it-is-longer-than, 5 there-was-no-other, 6 take-anoth- 
 er-one, 7 all-of-their-money, 25 8 take-some-other, 9 you-ren- 
 der, 10 you-surrender-it, n never-surrender-it, 12 see-him- 
 scamper, 13 encumber-the-place, 14 was-a-banker, 15 eccen- 
 tric-people, 16 a-finger-brush, 50 17 stop-the-meter, 18 in- 
 neither-case, 19 you-wrote-letters. 59 
 
 9. Letter. (3385 130.) 
 
 Saginaw, Michigan, August i, 1904. 
 Hon. James Burrell Angell, 
 
 University of Michigan, 
 Ann Arbor, Michigan. 
 Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-am expecting to enter 25 the-University this fall. It-is- 
 my desire first to take the-literary course and-then enter 
 the-law school. I-would like-very-much 50 to-take both- 
 courses in-five years. Will-it be possible for-me to-do this? 
 I-have been in a-law-office for-two 75 years and-I-had sup- 
 posed that the-work done during this-time would-help ma- 
 terially to-reduce the-course at the-University. I-hear, how- 
 ever, 100 that-you never-allow work-done in a-law-office to- 
 apply on the-law course at the-University. Is this true? 
 I-hope that 125 what I-hear is incorrect for I-feel that the- 
 
146 PITMANIC 
 
 thorough work I-have done in-the-study of-law should-be 
 allowed to-apply 150 on my-course so that I-may finish both 
 courses in-the-five years. In-case it-is against your rules 
 to-make any allowance 175 for-this work I-shall probably go 
 to-some-other school since my business affairs are such that 
 I-must finish my education within five 200 years. I-hope, if- 
 you have-such a-rule at the-University, you-will make-an- 
 exception in-my-case. I-know that I-can 225 satisfy-you by- 
 just as thorough a-test as-you care to-apply in the-form of 
 an-examination that I-have-done first-class 250 work so far 
 as T-have gone in-the-study of-the-law and-that of the-two 
 years I-have to the-subject no 273 time was ever-allowed 
 to-go-to waste. 
 
 Will-you therefore please to inform-me just-what your 
 rules are, and-if-they-are-against 300 allowing anything for- 
 work-done in a-law-office before entering the-University, 
 is there any-chance of -your making an-exception in-my- 
 case ? 325 Your-early attention will-oblige-me very-much. 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 James Mulligan, Jr. 338 
 
 10. Translation. 
 
SHORTHAND 147 
 
 LESSON XL. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 1 i ) What large final hook is used with straight letters 
 on the side opposite the s-circle? 
 
 (2) May the tiv-hook be written on curved letters? 
 
 (3) May the tiv-hook ever be used when the letters 
 represented by the hook are divided between two syllables? 
 
 (4) What vowels may intervene between the stroke 
 and a following tiv-hook? 
 
 (5) When an s-circle occurs immediately after a 
 tiv-hook where is it written ? 
 
 (6) Give three words illustrating the use of the tiv- 
 hook. 
 
 V_(7) How are the sounds of st represented when they 
 occur together at the beginning or end of a syllable? 
 
 (8) What is this loop called ? 
 
 (9) May it be used for any other sounds except that 
 of st? 
 
 (10) Is it ever allowable to use the st-loop to repre- 
 sent st when s is at the end of one syllable and t at the be- 
 ginning of the next ? 
 
 ( 1 1 ) Give an illustration. 
 
 (12) On which side of straight letters must the st- 
 loop be written? 
 
 (13) May it ever be used on the n-hook side of 
 straight letters? 
 
 ( 14) When the sounds of s and t are the last con- 
 sonant sounds in a word and a sounded vowel follows, may 
 the st-loop be used ? 
 
 (15) W T hen an s-circle follows a st-loop where is it 
 written ? 
 
148 PITMAN 1C 
 
 (16) May the st-loop be used when, because of its 
 use, a following stroke in the same word would necessarily 
 be struck across the letter to which the st-loop is attached? 
 
 (17) How are the letters str usually represented when 
 they occur together in a syllable or when they occur in suc- 
 cession part at the end of a syllable and part at the beginning 
 of the following syllable ? 
 
 (18) On what letters may the str-loop be used? 
 
 (19) On which side of straight letters is this loop 
 used? 
 
 (20) How does this loop compare in size with the 
 st-loop ? 
 
 (21) If the letters str are the last consonants in a 
 word and a sounded vowel follows may the str-loop be used ? 
 
 (22) How is an s-circle written when it immediately 
 follows the str-loop? 
 
 (23) May the s-shun-hook be used immediately fol- 
 lowing the str-loop? 
 
 (24) How much wider is the str-loop than the st- 
 loop? 
 
 (25) What letter is added by making emp double 
 length ? 
 
 (26) What are the two endings either of which may 
 be added by making ing double length? 
 
 (27) What are the three endings any one of which 
 is added by making any of the other curved letters double 
 length ? 
 
 (28) Are the endings added by the lengthening of 
 curved letters necessarily in the same syllables with the let- 
 ters which are made double length? 
 
SHORTHAND 149 
 
 EXERCISE 40. 
 
 2. List Words. (67 1:15.) 
 
 Dative active talkative actively corrective executive neg- 
 ative illustrative instructive protective breast blasting ghost 
 zest druggist investigation manifest chastised hosts staff 
 utmost majestic pleased against bounced 23 noised yeast re- 
 joiced incrust roaster poster bolster dexter strong strangle 
 register administer strange illustration songster gamester 
 casters pastor feasters blister fester dusters lumber anger 
 tamper-"'" cylinder central entirely Anderson eastern swifter 
 swelter hanker lender Alexander welter meter tinker feather 
 cimeter amber chamber 07 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 Subjective, descriptive,. connective, collective, (collective- 
 ly,) reflective, (reflectively,) figurative, (figuratively,) 
 legislative, consecutive, (consecutively,) inductive, (in- 
 ductively,) objective, (objectively.) herein, we- 
 must, six-or-seven, temptation, stenography, (stenog- 
 rapher, stenographic.) one-of-the-best, one-of-the-most, first, 
 next, next-time, at-first, at-the-first. Baptist, by-the-first, by 
 way-of-illustration, constitution-of-the-United-States, cir- 
 cumstance, (circumstances,) denominational, deliverance, 
 extraordinary, fqr-the-first-time, from-first-to-last, mystery, 
 Northwest, later-than, another-one, of-their, no-other, some- 
 other, trie-other, the-other-one, longer-than. any-other, some- 
 other-one. 
 
 4. Phrases. (81 i :2O.) 
 
 He-was-subjective a-descriptive-case legislative-affairs 
 in-the-dative such-talkativeness executive-days he-is-elective 
 we-must-do take-one-or-two 25 two-or-three-cases steno- 
 graphic-work must-expect-many-cases he-was-accused a- 
 new-duster purchase-a-toaster use-the-duster examine-the- 
 
150 PITMANIC 
 
 register 50 will-add-luster a-large-poster the-obstruction has- 
 much-luster was-later-than there-was-no-other you-render 
 encumber-the-place eccentric-people 75 a-finger-brush stop- 
 the-meter. 81 
 
 5. Letter. (941 :so.) 
 
 Dayton, Ohio, May 7, 1904. 
 
 John Loomis, 
 
 Milan, Mich. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 On Friday I-delivered to the-express company six-cases 25 
 of paper. These-should have-been in Milan on Saturday. 
 I-am-sure there is something wrong. The-delay is likely 
 due to-carelessness of r ' the-express-men. I-presume it-will 
 take several-days to-trace the-package. I-shall have the- 
 company trace-it at-once. Should-you 75 fail to-receive the- 
 stock within a-few days, be-sure to-write again. 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Moore Brothers. 94 
 
 6. Letter. (121 2:00.) 
 
 Lexington, Ky., Nov. 22, 1900. 
 
 Col. James Otis, 
 
 Nashville, Tenn. 
 My-Dear-Colonel : 
 
 I-have your favor of the-tenth. Your 25 plan to push vig- 
 orously the-petition in-favor of General Ashton for the- 
 office of U.-S. Marshal for the-next term has my-approval. 50 
 The-general deserves the-honor and-it-is-my sincere hope 
 that both-members of the-senate from-your state will-do 
 everything possible to 75 induce Mr. McKinley to-select Gen. 
 Ashton. I-am at-your service if-there is anything I-can-do 
 to-aid you in-his-behalf. 100 Be-sure to-write-me if-you see 
 
SHORTHAND 151 
 
 wherein I-can assist-yoti in-any-manner-whatever. 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Thomas Eaton. 121 
 
 7. Letter. (1893:05.) 
 
 Ann Arbor, Mich., June I, 1904. 
 Mr. Jerome Freeman, 
 
 Mason, Michigan. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-hear that-you-expect soon to-emplov L>r> one-or-two more 
 stenographers in-your factory. If-I-am correct in-this, I- 
 desire to-make application for a-position with-your com- 
 pany. 50 I-have taken a-course at the-school here and-can- 
 now take dictation at a-ratc which-would e;iablc-:r.c to-do 
 your work 73 in-a-manner satisfactory to-you. I-am willing 
 to begin at a-low rate, and-continue at a-small salary until 
 I-shall prove 100 to-you that-my services are worth more. 
 I-can come at any-time. I-enclose a-number of-testimonials 
 and-can furnish as-many 1 - 3 more as-you-may desire as^o- 
 character and-ability as-an-amanuensis. Ail-that I-wish to- 
 begin with is-a-chance to show 150 what I-can-do and-what 
 I-am worth to-an-employer. I-hope that-you may have a- 
 place for-rne in a-very 173 few-days. I-shall await your 
 reply with-much anxiety. 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Thomas Worden. 189 
 
 LESSON XLL 
 
 THE; HALVING PRINCIPLE, SEC. i. 
 
 i. Of the various methods of contraction in Shorthand 
 the most important is that introduced in this lesson, i. e., 
 
152 PITMANIC 
 
 the halving principle. It is that of indicating a t or d 
 in certain cases by writing the preceding simple or modified 
 stroke half the medium length. 
 
 2. The general rule is that the t or d indicated by this 
 method must be in the same syllable with the stroke shorten- 
 ed to indicate it. When it is clearly evident that consider- 
 able speed may be gained or much more distinct angles se- 
 cured without decreasing the legibility this rule may be 
 varied, as in pocket, shown below. There are probably 
 more exceptions to this rule than to any other in the entire 
 system of Shorthand. In order to prevent the student from 
 unintentionally going to the extremes in this respect, the list 
 words in this lesson are, in the main, confined to words 
 which follow the rule somewhat closely. When the student 
 becomes more familiar with the use of the halving principle 
 he will be able to distinguish readily when he may vary the 
 general rule without danger to legibility. 
 
 3. The following illustrations show the use of the halv- 
 ing principle applied to letters without hooks : 
 
 V , -L S .*, i V 
 
 t ~i 
 
 pocket hate instigate result innocent tract promote art 
 
 4. For the sake of convenience in referring to half 
 length characters they are spoken of as follows : Half 
 length be to indicate a t is called bet; to indicate a d, bed. 
 A half length kay to indicate a t is called ket; to indicate 
 a d, ked, etc. The rule adopted by some Pitmanic teachers 
 never to use a single half length shaded letter to indicate a 
 t or a single half length light letter to indicate a d is not 
 observed in this text. Hence gate would be written get 
 and not gay-te, and code would be written ked and not 
 kay-de. 
 
SHORTHAND 153 
 
 5. When t or d is the last consonant in a word and a 
 sounded vowel follows, the full stroke te or de must be 
 used, as in needy, body and pity, written en-de, be-de, 
 and pe-te. 
 
 6. To secure greater legibility a single unhooked stroke 
 is never written half length to represent a word of more 
 than one syllable. For example, abate, abide, etc., are writ- 
 ten be-te, be-de, while the word bait is written bet, and 
 bide is written bed. 
 
 7. It has become the custom, though with no good rea- 
 son, for Pitmanic writers, including the Graham and other 
 slightly modified Pitman systems, not to write ray half 
 length when it is the only stroke in a word besides a t or 
 d. Hence rate, for example, is written ray-te and not ret; 
 and road is written ray-de and not red, etc. 
 
 8. It has been advised that the double length letters be 
 made a little longer than twice the length of the ordinary 
 letters. Likewise the half length letters should be made 
 a little less than half length so that no confusion between 
 the letters of different lengths may result. 
 
 EXERCISE 41. 
 Using the halving-principle write the following words : 
 
 9. List Words. (60 1:15.) 
 
 i Boat, 2 coat, 3 date, 4 fate, 5 gate, 6 hate, 7 jot, 8 kite, 
 9 late 1 , 10 mate, n note, 12 paid, 13 operate, 14 east, 15 tote, 
 1 6 vote, 17 berate, 18 theft, 19 legislate, 20 bracelet, 
 21 adopt, 22 dictate, 23 estate, 24 espied, 25 elect, 26 eject, 
 27 erect, 28 rotate, 29 invade, 30 reviewed, 31 repeat, 
 32 recent, 33 fade, 34 good, 35 picket, 36 absent, 37 decent, 
 38 peasant, 39 pleasant, 40 present, 41 pheasant, 42 accent, 
 43 execute, 44 sent, 45 crescent, 46 sentence, 47 chestnut, 
 48 basket, 49 receded, 50 refute, 51 invite, 52 implicate, 
 
154 PITMANIC 
 
 53 circuit, 54 remit, 55 capital, 56 ratify, 57 rectify, 58 notify, 
 59 certain, 60 jacket. 
 10. Wordsigns. 
 
 Almighty after afternoon as-it asso- all-the do-it east-and- emphatic 
 for-it ciate world west 
 
 , ^ 
 
 A. ^ "^ "^ " <r- 
 
 feature fear-of- future good-and- manuscript nature natural of-it 
 if-it God fact bad 
 
 some-what some-time use-it wisdom world without yesterday about 
 
 establish at-it territory heart history is-it had-it 
 
 established it-had 
 establishment it-would 
 
 11. Phrases. (65 i :oo.) 
 
 i A-rainy-afternoon, 2 after-six-days, 3 was-absent, 4 in- 
 an-afternoon, 5 as-it-was-coming, 6 associate-cases, 7 in-all- 
 the-world, 8 stay-and-do-it, 2r> 9 east-and-west, 10 an-em- 
 phatic-story, n a-new-feature, 12 in-future-times, 13 the- 
 good-and-bad, 14 took-his-manuscript, 15 nature-of-the-case, 
 1 6 several-facts, 50 17 it-sometimes-came, 18 it-will-implicate- 
 him, 19 in-the-capitol, 20 recent-action, 21 they-may-ratify. 65 
 
 12. Letter. (689 11:00.) 
 
 East Saginaw, Mich., August 7, 1904. 
 Mrs. Jane Frost, 
 
 Marine City, Michigan. 
 My-Dear Mrs. Frost: 
 
 It-has-been so-long since 25 I-have received a-letter from- 
 you that I-fear you have left Marine City. I-trust, if-you 
 have, this letter will-be sent 50 to-you at-once. I-have just 
 
SHORTHAND 155 
 
 received a-nice long letter from Etta Stover. As-you have 
 asked about her so often, I-decided 75 to-write-you at-once 
 and-tell-yoit what news I-have just received from-her. I- 
 am-sure you-will be-pleased to-hear 100 of-her experience. 
 You-will recollect that while she-was at-school she-took up 
 the-study of Spanish and-became very proficient in-that 125 
 language. She-could both write and-speak it fluently. Then, 
 you-will-remember, she-had another hobby. When-she was 
 at-the University of Michigan, 150 she-took up the-study of 
 stenography in-addition to-her regular-college work. You- 
 know her-people were wealthy ami-she was not obliged 175 
 to-work, but she always said that-we never could-tell what- 
 might happen to us and- she proposed to-be-ready for-any 
 emergency. 200 Well, in-her-case, the-emergency came all 
 too-soon. Within a-year after-she left-college her father 
 met- with several reverses in-business 5 and-lost all of-his 
 property. Then it-was that Etta's special-work, both in 
 stenography-and Spanish, was-a-boon to-her. Her-moth- 
 er 250 had died sometime before this and-her father's re- 
 verses broke-down his health. This left him helpless with 
 no-one to-support him but-his" 8 daughter. As-it was too- 
 late in the-year to-secure a-school Etta began to-look about 
 to see- what could be-done. Luckily' 500 she-had become so- 
 taken up with the-beautiful art of stenography that-she bad- 
 kept up her practice and-was a-rapid w ? riter. She :i - r> at- 
 once began to-look-for a-position as an-amanuensis. She 
 writes-me that every day for-over a-week she-did nothing 
 but 350 go to one office after another in New-York-City seek- 
 ing a-position, but-without-success. But she never thought 
 of failure. Finally she came 375 to the-office of-the West 
 India Transportation Company. "Yes," the-manager said, 
 in-reply-to her application, "I-desire-a stenographer and-de- 
 sire one 100 right-away, but," he-said, "I-doubt if-you-can 
 
156 PITMANIC 
 
 do the-work I-must-have done. I-have, since-the Spanish 
 war, established agencies 425 throughout Cuba and Porto 
 Rico, and-must-have-a stenographer who knows Spanish 
 thoroughly. I-have been unable so far, to-secure such-a- 
 one 450 in-this city or anywhere else. I-must-have just such 
 an-amanuensis and-am willing to pay liberally for-such-a- 
 one." "You-may 475 imagine," Etta writes, "how-my heart 
 throbbed while the-manager was-specifying what he-must- 
 have in-a stenographer for I- just knew I-could 500 do the- 
 work." To-tell a-long-story in-a-few sentences, Etta began 
 work that-very day at-a-large salary. She-says she 525 has 
 no trouble in-doing the-work. 
 
 She-writes that-from what she-sees there-will-be, for- 
 years to-come, a-large-number of 350 openings for stenog- 
 raphers who-can write and-translate Spanish. Since the- 
 opening up of-the West Indies to American commerce there- 
 is, as-a-result, 573 a-rapid increase in the-business relations 
 between these-new territories and-the United-States. 
 
 She-is very-happy in-her new-position since-she 600 really 
 enjoys the-work and-at the-same-time can also help her 
 father so-much. She-says that her knowledge of stenog- 
 raphy has-been 625 and-is of-more practical value to-her, 
 especially when-it-comes-to-making a-living, than-her entire- 
 college education. Etta's present address is 650 407 Union 
 Square, New-York-City. I-am sure she-would-be veryt- 
 much pleased to-hear from-you. I-know you-will 075 write- 
 her at-once now that-you have her-address. 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 Ethel Welch. 689 
 
SHORTHAND 157 
 
 13. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XLII. 
 
 THK HALVING PRINCIPLE, SEC. II. 
 
 1. Way, yea, emp and ing are rarely halved. It is 
 therefore possible with the four corresponding light strokes, 
 ar, el, em and en, to make a distinction between the adding 
 of t and d. D is added by halving these letters and also 
 shading them ; t is added by merely writing these light let- 
 ters half length. This increases the legibility of these let- 
 ters when halved. As it is impossible when using a pen 
 to shade an upward stroke, el and not lay must be used when 
 it is halved and shaded to add d. 
 
 2. This principle is illustrated in the following words : 
 
 V ^*S~ '-N 2. *^s **S V ~> 
 
 failed felt made met net node ford article 
 
 3. Em, en, el and ar are not shaded to add a following 
 d when these letters are modified by a hook. If this rule 
 were not observed when halving these letters an en with a 
 
158 PITMANIC 
 
 w-hook, if shaded to add d, would conflict with an en which 
 is shaded when modified with an r-hook, etc. 
 
 4. In such cases as cored, gored and similar words, 
 the shaded downward ar does not form a sufficiently clear 
 angle. Therefore in words where r follows kay or gay 
 and is to be halved it is better to represent a following t or 
 d by a halved ray. 
 
 5. A kay or gay following lay, ef or ve is not halved 
 to represent t or d for the reason that the half length letters, 
 not forming an angle with what precedes would be lost sight 
 of. Therefore such words as looked, effect, vacate, etc., 
 must be written in full, thus : vacate, ve-kay-te, and not 
 ve-ket; effect, ef-kayrte, and not ef-ket; and looked, lay- 
 kay-te and not lay-ket. For the same reason a half 
 length ish cannot be used after lay, and similar outlines 
 which will be evident to the student. Occasionally it is 
 not convenient to use an el shaded when halved to add d, 
 as in mislaid and embezzled. In such cases the half length 
 lay is used since with it the outline may be formed more 
 easily and quickly. 
 
 6. Although it is the general rule that the t or d repre- 
 sented by a half length letter should occur in the same sylla- 
 ble with the letter made half length, the past tense of regu- 
 lar verbs, formed by adding ed, is usually represented by 
 the halving principle, as in plated, written pel-ted, and 
 gloated, written gel-ted. 
 
 EXERCISE 42. 
 
 Using the proper halved characters, write the following 
 words : 
 
 7. List Words. (60 i :i5.) 
 
 i Made, 2 nude, 3 bored, 4 load, 5 old, 6 yard, 7 model, 
 8 end, 9 note, 10 deplored, n blamed, 12 reasoned, 13 index, 
 
SHORTHAND 159 
 
 14 needle, 15 Leonard, 16 knit, 17 sent, 18 fight, 19 slit, 
 20 modify, 21 light, 22 fault, 23 salt, 24 slating, 25 gored, 
 26 need, 27 needless, 28 sand, 29 night, 30 mead, 31 mute, 
 32 meddle, 33 middle, 34 mailed, 35 indolence, 36 neat, 
 37 manifold, 38 medium, 39 toiled, 40 mood, 41 renewed, 
 42 modulation, 43 field, 44 unfold, 45 absurd, 46 unsold, 
 47 delayed, 48 poured, 49 pervade, 50 ascend, 51 blossomed, 
 52 assumed, 53 mould, 54 descendant, 55 indivisible, 56 end- 
 less, 57 doled, 58 lewd, 59 finite, 60 imminent. 
 8. Wordsigns. 
 
 downward hand handsome before- behold hand- immediate under 
 
 hand beheld in-hand immediately 
 
 hold lord heard hard have- have- hand-writing hazard hardware 
 held read word it had 
 
 9. Phrases. (56 -.55.) 
 
 i Goes-downward, 2 going-downward, 3 will-have-it, 
 4 a-handsome-case, 5 many-handsome-cases, 6 behold-you- 
 come, 7 you-will-behold, 8 many-beheld, 9 will-have-imme- 
 diate-trial, 25 10 in-such-history, n must-have-it, 12 have-it- 
 taken, 13 such-hazards, 14 is-it-coming, 15 have-had-it, 
 1 6 pray-the-Lord, 17 they-had-it, 18 immediate-effect, 50 
 19 I-have-it, 20 never-have-it. 5e 
 
 10. Letter. (196 3:15.) 
 
 Nashville, Tenn., August 9, 1904. 
 Loren Sampson, 
 
 Bay City, Mich. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-was indeed very-much pleased to-receive-your 25 letter 
 last night with the-in formation that I-was to have that-old 
 matter off-my hands so soon. I-think you did very well 50 
 
160 PITMANIC 
 
 to dispose of all-those lots, especially those- with the-old 
 houses upon-them, so-readily and-at-such very-good prices. 
 As-it-has 75 now come-out I-will lose very-little on the-deal. 
 If -you- will send me your bill I-will send-you-check to-bal- 
 ance 100 same. I-have signed all the-deeds to the-various 
 pieces of property and-same have gone by to-day's mail. I- 
 hope that-they-will 125 reach-you safely. 
 
 It-is a-relief to-me to have that entire estate business 
 closed up. I-desire to-assure you that I-fully 150 appreciate 
 your work in-bringing the-business to-such an-early-close. 
 
 Whenever I-have anything in the-line of-real-estate to- 
 look after 175 in the-future you-may-be-sure that I-will send- 
 it to-you. I-am, 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Benjamin Lathrop. 196 
 
 n. Suggestion. (185 3:00.) 
 
 Those who-have reached this-lesson may feel that-they- 
 are very nearly through with the-study of the-principles of 
 stenography, and-that all 25 they need after finishing the-few 
 remaining lessons is plenty of-practice on miscellaneous 
 matter, especially practice on letters, to-work up speed. 
 One should 50 make a-specialty of-studying the-Wordsigns, 
 writing them over-and-over-again many-times. That-is one- 
 thing so-many beginners neglect. Every Wordsign 75 in 
 the-book should be-written over at-least once-a-day for-sev- 
 eral weeks. When the-pupil can write the-whole list of 
 Wordsigns 100 in the-book without stopping at the-rate of 
 say sixty or seventy words per minute he-may then begin 
 to-feel that-he knows 125 the-Wordsigns fairly well. The- 
 young stenographer who can write his Wordsigns with no- 
 more thought than is necessary for-one to-make use-of 150 
 when he dots his i's ami-crosses his t's, is in-a-fair way to- 
 
SHORTHAND 161 
 
 succeed as-a stenographer. Remember-this and-practice on 
 your 175 Wordsigns daily. You-never can-give them too- 
 ir.uch practice. 185 
 
 12. Translation. 
 
 / s 
 
 'V lf> *V 
 
 /\ 
 
 ' G"- A . / 
 
 ^ \/ 
 
 LESSON XLIII. 
 THE; HALVING PRINCIPLE, SEC. in. 
 
 i. Any consonant stroke, modified by either an initial 
 or final small hook or by both an initial and final small hook, 
 may, like the simple letters, be halved to indicate a following 
 t or d. When a hooked letter is halved it is treated as a 
 single letter and the t or d added must occur after both the 
 stroke and" the letter or letters indicated by the hook or 
 hooks. For example, the word faint is composed of the 
 consonants f-n-t. The n-hook is used to indicate a follow- 
 ing n and the character fen is made half length and both the 
 f and n are read before the added t. The word fatten, with 
 the t coming before the n, would not, therefore, permit of 
 the use of the half length hooked letter, fen, the word fatten 
 being written fet-en. Likewise in the word cleaned, for 
 
1 62 PITMANIC 
 
 example, the double hooked letter klen is halved to repre- 
 sent a d after the letters represented by both the hooks and 
 the stroke. 
 
 2. The half length hooked letters are spoken of as fol- 
 lows : A half length fel is called flet if t is indicated, and 
 fled if d is indicated. A half length plen is called plent, 
 if t is indicated, and plend, if d is indicated, etc. 
 
 3. Although some reporters occasionally shorten a 
 stroke upon which the shun-hook, tive-hook, large w-hook, 
 ler-hook, rel-hook, st-loop or str-loop is used, it is best 
 not to use the halving-principle with a letter modified by 
 one of these large hooks or loops, unless it is very inconven- 
 ient to add the stroke te or de. 
 
 4. The use of the halving principle with hooked letters 
 is shown in the following words : 
 
 ^ (^ \^ 
 
 rambled migrate coughed mounting insolvent inclined demand gratify 
 
 EXERCISE 43. 
 
 Using the proper shortened hooked consonants write : 
 
 5. List Words. (56 1 105.) 
 
 I Flagrant, 2 brittle, 3 depend, 4 found, 5 bound, 6 lament, 
 7 patent, 8 retained, 9 expend, 10 extend, n indent, 12 plan- 
 tain, 13 spending, 14 suspend, 15 tendency, 16 fountain, 
 17 incident, 18 mountain, 19 grant, 20 front, 21 puffed, 
 22 craft, 23 drained, 24 cleaned, 25 friend, 26 enchained, 
 27 clamored, 28 shirt, 29 silvered, 30 papered, 31 crowed, 
 32 glut, 33 Richard, 34 hypocrite, 35 prevent, 36 celebrate, 
 37 refund, 38 violent, 39 random, 40 husband, 41 deplete, 
 42 talent, 43 degrade, 44 mankind, 45 democrat, 46 country, 
 47 rebound, 48 repent, 49 betrayed, 50 infant, 51 virtual, 
 
SHORTHAND 163 
 
 52 applicant, 53 freedom, 54 supplicant, 55 glutton, 56 tan- 
 gent. 
 
 6. Wordsigns. 
 
 J^L _ ^ _ S J ., - ' f 
 
 J 
 
 we-are- werc-not with- which- which- which- cannot till-it tell-it 
 
 not regard-to ought- not had-r.ot told 
 
 not wh-wd-nt 
 
 why-not will-not virtue upon-it understand under-go until-it unconcerned 
 , J o^ 
 
 /> .11 3 J ___ 
 
 ? 
 
 testament toward towards they- such- such-were- shorthand spirit 
 are-not are-not not 
 
 quite may-not minority majority hundred manufacture respectful 
 
 manufactured respectfully 
 manufacturing 
 manufacturer 
 
 7. Phrases. (60 i :oo.) 
 
 i Why-not-do-so, 2 we-are-not-coming, 3 with-regard-to- 
 it, 4 will-not-say-so, 5 by-virtue-of, 6 depend-upon-it, 7 he- 
 will-understand, 25 8 undergo-similar-treatment, 9 until-it- 
 comes, lo they-will-tell-it, n in-his-territory, 12 take-Short- 
 hand, 13 drained-the-canal, 14 they-repent, 15 all-mankind, 
 16 celebrate-the-occasion, 50 17 they-made-a-grave, 18 vio- 
 lent-case, 19 a-very-rich-man. 60 
 
 8. Letter. (167 2:45.) 
 
 Grass Lake, Mich., June 10, 1904. 
 Mr. Edward Weeks, 
 
 Port Huron, Mich. 
 My-Dear-Sir : _ 
 
 We-ftave finally decided to-accept 2 '"' your proposition on 
 thc-caal land near Saginaw, that-is to pay-you ten cents 
 
164 PITMANIC 
 
 per-ton on-all coal taken from beneath your farm 50 of-six- 
 htmdred and-forty acres, in-section seventeen. We-have 
 drawn lease to-this effect to-go into force July first and-to 
 continue 75 fourteen years with privilege of five years more 
 upon same "terms should- we so desire. We-have mailed 
 instructions to-our representative in Port Huron, 100 to-whom 
 we-will send lease ready for-you to-e^ecute. Please-to give- 
 this matter your early-attention as-it-is our desire to 125 begin 
 work not later-than July first. This-will necessitate our 
 ordering machinery without-delay. We cannot place our 
 order until we receive the-lease 150 duly executed. We-hope 
 this matter will-have your immediate attention. 
 
 Respectfully-yours, 
 
 Irwin LeGrand & Co. 187 
 
 9. Letter. (159 2:40.) 
 
 Port Huron, Mich., June 14, 1904. 
 Irwin LeGrand & Co., 
 
 Grass Lake, Michigan. 
 Sirs : 
 
 Your-letter of-the loth inst. 25 was received Monday. 
 Your representative in-this city, Mr. J. B. Dickinson, called 
 the-same day with lease for-my signature. Examining-it 
 I-discovered 50 that-you had left out one-item which-was 
 agreed-upon when we-talked the-business over last week. 
 I-refer to the-matter of 75 excavations for the-proposed mine. 
 The-understanding was that-you were to have but-one open- 
 ing and-that said-opening with the-necessary machinery 
 was 100 to-occupy only three acres, said-three acres to-be 
 wherever you desired them adjoining the-railroad-track. 
 
 [-put this-clause in the-lease 125 before-signing. If-this-is 
 satisfactory, and-of-course it-will-be, since-it was agreed- 
 
SHORTHAND 165 
 
 upon, yon-can file the-lease and-go-ahead 130 with the-pur- 
 chase of-machinery. 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Edward Weeks. 159 
 10. Translation. 
 
 
 LESSON XLIV. 
 
 THE HALVING PRINCIPLE, SEC. IV. 
 
 1. When an s-circle occurs at the end of a shortened 
 consonant, either simple or modified by one or more hooks, 
 the s is read after the added t or d. This difference of the 
 s-circle from the hooks representing letters which must be 
 read before the t or d, should be carefully rioted by the stu- 
 dent. This principle is shown in the words gloats and 
 kinds given below. 
 
 2. It sometimes happens that a final half length te or 
 de does not make an angle, or makes a very poor angle, 
 with the preceding letter. In such cases the half length let- 
 ter may be disjoined from the preceding stroke. This is 
 called the disjoined ted. Its use is shown in such words 
 
166 PITMANIC 
 
 as dated, dreaded, opinionated and omitted. If it were 
 not disjoined the half length letter would be lost sight of. 
 The disjoined ted, when used, should be written beside and 
 very close to the end of the letter from which it is disjoined, 
 as shown below. 
 
 3. The strokes way and emp are sometimes, though 
 rarely, shortened. The exception is in such words as 
 jumped, swayed, etc. 
 
 4. Occasionally it is found convenient to write a half 
 length es with an upward stroke, as in factionist. 
 
 5. When a final t or d is preceded by two separately pro- 
 nounced vowels as in poet, duet, quiet, etc., the halving 
 principle cannot be made use of. 
 
 6. The above principles are illustrated by the following 
 words : 
 
 ^_ _z l_ _L^< V * LA_ 
 
 gloats kinds dreaded dated jumped pumped swayed factioniet 
 
 EXERCISE 44. 
 
 Using the prope'r outlines write the following words: 
 
 7. List Words. (53 i :oo.) 
 
 i Floats, 2 cuts, 3 inflates, 4 cadets, 5 indents, 6 refutes, 
 7 amusements, 8 treated, 9 doted, 10 dreaded, n institute, 
 12 omitted, 13 attitude, 14 opinionated, 15 annotated, 16 sit- 
 uated, 17 waited, 18 dated, 19 edited, 20 awaited, 21 audited, 
 22 instituted, 23 deeded, 24 prompted, 25 attempted, 26 ex- 
 empted, 27 preempted, 28 indicated, 29 freighted, 30 tooted, 
 31 effected, 32 admitted, 33 mated, 34 meted, 35 emptied, 
 36 mooted, 37 strutted, 38 trotted, 39 traded, 40 matted, 
 41 entreated, 42 studded, 43 credited, 44 indicated, 45 imi- 
 tated, 46 limited, 47 submitted, 48 resubmitted, 49 animated, 
 50 intimated, 51 redeeded, 52 reindicated, 53 unattempted. 
 
SHORTHAND 167 
 
 8. Wordsigns. 
 
 astonish-ed act-of at-all- according behind child circulate 
 astonishment Congress events according-to be-not 
 
 creature 
 
 \ 
 
 co-operate can-it circum- construe- delight dcriva- did-not do-not dare-not 
 stantial tion tive 
 
 for-the- from-it forward guilt gentle- gtntle- give-it gave-it 
 most-part guilty men man 
 
 historian have-not b^tter-than movement 
 
 9. Phrases. (60 i :oo.) 
 
 i Astonish-him, 2 much-astonishment, 3 be-at-it, 4 an-act- 
 of-Congress, 5 take-the-child, 6 behind-it, 7 was-better-than, 
 8 a-new-creature, 9 you-must-cooperate, 25 10 cannot-do-so, 
 ii a-delightful-day, 12 dare-not-come, 13 many-gentlemen, 
 14 will-not-give, 15 he-was-historian, 16 seven-hundred, 
 17 have-not-come, 18 hear- from-it, 50 19 a-grand-occasion, 
 20 will-you-cooperate, 21 he-was-a-gentleman. 00 
 
 10. Letter. (168 2:45.) 
 
 New Albany, Ind., May n, 1904. 
 Messrs. Johnson & West, 
 
 St. Louis, Mo. 
 My-Dear-Sirs : - 
 
 Your agent was-here yesterday 25 and-I-gave-him an-order. 
 I-find that the-foreman in-one of-our departments neglected 
 to enter-upon the-order book certain material 50 that I-must- 
 have at-once. Will-you, therefore, add the-following to 
 our order : 
 
1 68 PITMANIC 
 
 1 Gross Pint Tin Cups. 
 
 y 4 Gross Quart Tin 75 Cups. 
 4 dozen 4-Quart Tin Pails. 
 
 2 dozen 6-Quart Tin Pails. 
 ^Gross Quart Tin Dippers. 
 Y> Gross Pint Tin Dippers. 100 
 
 l /4 Gross 2-Quart Granite Stew Pans. 
 l /> Gross 3-Quart Granite "Stew Pans. 
 
 3 dozen Challenge Egg Beaters. 
 
 I-hope this letter 125 will reach-you in-time for-you to-sencl 
 the-above items with the-goods ordered through your agent 
 and-thus avoid an-extra shipment. 150 
 
 To-make-sure of-it I-send this with special-delivery stamp. 
 I-am, Yours-truly, 
 
 Thomas Benton. 168 
 
 ii. Letter. (139 2:15.) 
 
 New Orleans, La., July 5, 1904. 
 Grayson & Co., 
 
 Duluth, Minn. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 We-beg to inform-you that the-last car of 25 refrigerators 
 you billed on June 20 has-not-yet arrived in-this city. We- 
 are beginning to get uneasy about it for our supply 50 is 
 running very-low. Will-you please trace-it by wire at- 
 once. It-is probably side-tracked somewhere and-will no- 
 doubt lie there 75 until a-tracer reaches-it. Do-not fail to 
 keep the-tracer moving until-you succeed in locating-it as- 
 our supply is about exhausted 100 and-then, too, we would-be 
 obliged to carry the-entire shipment over to the-next season, 
 a-thing we-desire to avoid, if-possible. 125 
 
 Hoping that-this-will receive-your immediate attention, 
 I-am, Respectfully-yours, 
 
 Theodore Parker. 139 
 
SHORTHAND 169 
 
 12. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XLV. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 i. QUESTIONS : 
 
 1 i ) What letters are indicated by writing certain let- 
 ters half length ? 
 
 (2) As a rule must the t or d indicated by writing a 
 letter half length, be in the same syllable with the shortened 
 letter ? 
 
 (3) Is this rule always strictly observed? 
 
 (4) What two exceptions to this rule and why are 
 they made? 
 
 (5) When t or d is the last consonant in a word and 
 a sounded vowel follows, may a preceding stroke be halved 
 to indicate the t or d? 
 
 (6) By what names are the half length letters desig- 
 nated ? 
 
 (7) Give several examples. 
 
 (8) Would it be proper to write a half length b for 
 the word abode? 
 
170 PITMANIC 
 
 (9) Is it allowable to write ray half length to repre- 
 sent a following t or d when the t or d is the only other con- 
 sonant in the word? 
 
 (10) Are yea, way, emp and ing frequently halved? 
 (n) How are ar, lay, em and en modified in addi- 
 tion to being halved when a d is to be indicated ? 
 
 (12) When ar, lay, em and en are modified by a 
 hook are they shaded as well as halved to indicate ad? 
 
 (13) How is a d indicated when it is inconvenient to 
 use a half length shaded el? 
 
 (14) Where an r follows kay or gay and is to be 
 halved to indicate a t or d how should it be written and why ? 
 
 (15) Is it proper to use a half length kay or gay after 
 an ef, ve or lay? 
 
 (16) May a half length ish be used after lay? 
 
 (17) Is it ever allowable to use a half length lay to 
 represent a following d? If so, give example. 
 
 ( 18) How is the past tense of regular verbs indicated ? 
 
 (19) May letters with initial or final hooks be halved 
 to add a following t or d? 
 
 (20) If a hooked letter is written half length does 
 the t or d indicated come before or after the letters indicated 
 by the hook or hooks? 
 
 (21) When a half length letter has an s-circle at 
 its end is the s represented by the circle read before or after 
 the t or d indicated by halving? 
 
 (22) Is it advisable to halve letters containing the 
 shun-hook and the other large hooks? 
 
 (23) What is meant by the character called the dis- 
 joined ted and why is it used? 
 
 (24) Where should the disjoined ted always be 
 written ? 
 
SHORTHAND 171 
 
 (25) Is the halved es ever written upwards? If so, 
 give example. 
 
 (26) May a final t or d, though not followed by a 
 sounded vowel, be indicated by halving, if two separately 
 pronounced vowels immediately precede it? 
 
 EXERCISE 45. 
 
 2. List Words. (60 1:15.) 
 
 Boat hate late mate note operate theft reviewed sentence 
 chestnut receded implicate remit capital certain made nude 
 bored old index Leonard fault gored indolence absurd 25 un- 
 sold ascend assumed indivisible imminent flagrant found in- 
 dent spending mountain puffed clamored crowed Richard 
 celebrate random democrat country applicant tangent floats 
 cadets indents treated opinionated'" instituted indicated imi- 
 tated meted effected traded submitted 'animated redeeded 
 unattempted. 60 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 Almighty, after, (for-it,) afternoon, as-it, associate, all- 
 the- world, do-it, east-and-west, emphatic, feature, (if-it,) 
 fear-of-God, future, (fact,) good-and-bad, manuscript, na- 
 ture, natural, of-it, some-what, some-time, use-it, wisdom, 
 world, without, yesterday, about, establish, (established, es- 
 tablishment,) at-it, (it-had, it- would,) territory, heart, his- 
 tory, is-it, had-it, downward, hand, handsome, before-hand, 
 behold, (beheld,) hand-in-hand, immediate, (immediately,) 
 under, hold, (held,) lord, (read,) heard, (word,) hard, have- 
 it, have-had, hand-writing, hazard, hardware, we-are-not, 
 were-not, with-regard-to, which-ought-not, which-not, 
 which-had-not, ( which- would-not,) cannot, till-it, tell-it, 
 (told,) why-not, will-not, virtue, upon-it, understand, under- 
 go, until-it, unconcerned, testament, toward, towards, they- 
 are-not, such-are-not, such-were-not, shorthand, spirit, quite, 
 
172 PITMANIC 
 
 may-not, minority, majority, hundred, manufacture, (manu- 
 facturing, manufactured,) respectful, (respectfully,) aston- 
 ish, (astonished, astonishment,) act-of-Congress, at-all- 
 events, according, (according- to, creature,) behind, (be- 
 not,) child, circulate, co-operate, can-it, circumstantial, con- 
 struction, delight, derivative, did-not, do-not, dare-not, for- 
 the-most-part, from-it, forward, guilt, (guilty,) gentlemen, 
 gentleman, give-it, gave-it, historian, have-not, better-than, 
 movement.. 
 
 4. Phrases. (99 i :4O.) 
 
 In-all-the-world east-and-west an-emphatic-story a-new- 
 feature in-future-times took-his-manuscript it-will-implicate- 
 him all-mankind 23 going-downward many-handsome-cases 
 you-will-behold will-nave-immediate-trial you-will-have-it 
 have-it-taken they-had-it never-have-it 50 with-regard-to-it 
 by-virtue-of he-will-understand until-it-comes in-his-terri- 
 tory drained-the-canal celebrate-the-occasion be-at-it 75 an- 
 act-of-Congress was-better-than a-new-creature cannot-do- 
 so many-gentlemen he-was-historian have-not-come a-grand- 
 occasion." 
 
 5. Letter. (1963:15.) 
 
 Nashville, Tenn., August 9, 1904. 
 Loren Sampson, 
 
 Bay City, Mich. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-was indeed very-much pleased to-receive-your 25 letter 
 last night with the-information that I-was to have that-old 
 matter off-my hands so soon. I-think you did very well 50 
 to dispose of all-those lots, especially those-with the-old 
 houses upon-them, so-readily and-at-such very-good prices. 
 As-it-has 75 now come-out I-will lose very-little on the-deal. 
 If-you-will send me your bill I-will send-you-check to-bal- 
 
SHORTHAND 173 
 
 ance 100 same. I-have signed all the-deeds to the-various 
 pieces of property and-same have gone by to-day's mail. I- 
 hope that-they-will 125 reach-yoti safely. 
 
 It-is a-relief to-me to have that entire estate business 
 closed up. I-desire to-assure you that I-fully 150 appreciate 
 your work in-bringing the-business to-such an-early-close. 
 
 Whenever I-have anything in the-line of-real-estate to- 
 look after 175 in the-future you-may-be-sure that I-will send- 
 it to-you. I-am, 
 
 ' Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Benjamin Lathrop. 196 
 
 6. Letter. (159 2:40.) 
 
 Port Huron, Mich., June 14, 1904. 
 Irwin LeGrand & Co., 
 
 Grass Lake, Michigan. 
 Sirs : 
 
 Your-letter of-the loth inst. 25 was received Monday. 
 Your representative in-this city, Mr. J. B. Dickinson, called 
 the-same day with lease for-my signature. Examining-it 
 I-discovered 30 that-you had left out one-item which-was 
 agreed-upon when we-talked the-business over last week. 
 I-refer to the-matter of 75 excavations for the-proposed mine. 
 The-understanding was that-you were to have but-one open- 
 ing and-that said-opening with the-necessary machinery 
 was 100 to-occupy only three acres, said-three acres to-be 
 wherever you desired them adjoining the-railroad-track. 
 
 I-put this-clause in the-lease 125 before-signing. If-this-is 
 satisfactory, and-of-course it-will-be, since-it was agreed- 
 upon, you-can file the-lease and-go-ahead 150 with the-pur- 
 chase of-machinery. 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Edward Weeks. 159 
 
174 PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON XLVI. 
 
 PREFIXES. 
 
 1. The more frequently occurring prefixes are repre- 
 sented by brief signs. Some of these are disjoined from 
 the following letter. The others are joined. 
 
 2. The disjoined prefixes are : 
 
 1 i ) A dot to represent con, com or cog, as in condone, 
 comprise, cognate. 
 
 (2) An s-circle to represent self or circum, as in self- 
 respect, circumlocution. 
 
 (3) A slanting tick, like the tick for he, to represent 
 counter, contro, and contra, as in controvert, counter- 
 march, contraband. 
 
 (4) Em to represent magni, as in magnitude. 
 
 3. These disjoined prefixes should always be written 
 before writing the outines which they precede. The habit 
 of doing this should be cultivated from the very start or 
 the student will find himself going back to insert these 
 prefix signs after the outlines are written, thus consuming 
 more time than if the full outline for the prefix were used. 
 
 4. The joined prefixes are: 
 
 1 i ) A half length en to represent the prefixes intro, 
 inter, ante, and anti, as in introduce, interrupt, antidote, 
 antedate. 
 
 (2) Pe-iss to represent the prefix post, as in postman. 
 
 5. When the syllables con, com or cog occur between 
 two consonant strokes in a word, the two strokes are dis- 
 joined to indicate that either con, com or cog is to be sup- 
 plied, as in inconstant, incomplete, incognito. 
 
 It is the custom with many reporters and teachers to 
 omit the dot for the prefixes con, com and cog in the large 
 
SHORTHAND 175 
 
 majority of cases. This is not advisable for the beginner 
 who should write these signs in every instance, at least until 
 he has had considerable experience as a reporter. Even 
 then he should not omit them unless actually pressed for 
 time. These prefixes and the parts of an outline disjoined 
 to indicate corn, con and cog are illustrated in the following 
 outlines : 
 
 condone com- cognate self-re- circumlo- counter- contro- contra- magni- 
 prise spect cution act vert band tude 
 
 introduce interrupt antidote postman inconstant incomplete incognito 
 
 EXERCISE 46. 
 
 Using the proper prefixes and disjoined parts write the 
 following words : 
 
 6. List Words. (59 i :so.) 
 
 I Contemplate, 2 construe, 3 interdiction, 4 confine, 
 5 preconceive, 6 conceal, 7 countersign, 8 anticipation, 9 in- 
 terest, 10 condense, n circumference, 12 recommend, 13 con- 
 serve, 14 compatible, 15 recompense, 16 accomplish, 17 con- 
 cede, 18 antiquary, 19 companion, 20 constable, 21 compile, 
 22 conduce, 23 countermarch, 24 compound, 25 combine, 
 26 convene, 27 selfish, 28 circumvent, 29 counterpoise, 
 30 controversy, 31 contribute, 32 contraband, 33 antedilu- 
 vian, 34 antedate, 35 postman, 36 interval, 37 interurban, 
 38 inconsolable, 39 recognize, 40 interrogate, 41 inconsistent, 
 42 concern, 43 anticipate, 44 convert, 45 interest, 46 un- 
 conscious, 47 conspiracy. 48 conception, 49 congestion, 50 in- 
 compatible, 51 conversion, 52 interpose, 53 contemplation, 
 54 conduct, 55 comparison, 56 contemplation, 57 miscon- 
 ceive, 58 concur, 59 content. 
 
176 PITMANIC 
 
 7. Wordsigns. 
 
 as-great-as able- at-any- able-to- at-all- construct- conse- consequent 
 to rate give-it Its tive quence 
 
 L _ L 
 
 consequen- comprehend comprehen- consider consid- conflden- calculate 
 tial sion eration tial 
 
 ^p 
 
 great- greater- Great- heretofore hesitate human- 
 
 extent than Britain nature 
 
 r z. 
 
 intellect intelligence Incompetent part individual 
 
 party 
 
 8. Phrases. (60 i :oo.) 
 
 i* As-great-as-can-be, 2 will-take-interest, 3 able-to-call, 
 4 able-to-equal, 5 able-to-go, 6 go-at-any-rate, 7 was-at-all- 
 its, 25 8 was-constructive, 9 they-will-calculate-it, 10 a-great- 
 event, n greater-than-any, 12 a-large-heart, 13 was-human- 
 nature, 14 conceal-them, 15 strong-intellect, 16 he-was-in- 
 competent, 50 17 very-great-extent, 18 he-was-introduced, 
 19 receive-interest, 20 compound-it. 60 
 
 9. Letter. (167 2:45.) 
 
 Iowa City, Iowa, May n, 1904. 
 Mr. John Young, 
 
 Springfield, 111. 
 My-Dear-Sir: 
 
 Are-you still engaged in the-manufacture 25 of-rotary 
 churns? A-gentleman in-this city has recently purchased 
 a-large dairy-farm near here and-intends to-go into the-but- 
 ter-making r>0 business very largely. 
 
SHORTHAND 177 
 
 Since learning of-this yesterday it-has occurred to-me 
 that thc-rotary churn which-you were manufacturing when- 
 I-was in 7r> Springfield would-be just the-thing for-him. If- 
 you are still interested in-this business, send me your de- 
 scriptive catalogue and-I-will place 100 it in the-hands of 
 the-aforesaid gentleman and-at the-same time personally 
 urge-him to adopt trie-churn you-are making. Knowing 
 what 125 I-do of-it, I-am sure it- would please-him. If-you- 
 like you-might also write the-gentleman direct. His name 
 is Henry 150 Patterson, and-mail will reach-him addressed 
 simply, Iowa City, Iowa. I-am, 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 John Elfring. 167 
 
 10. Letter. (2383:55.) 
 
 Springfield, 111., May 14, 1904. 
 
 Mr. John Elfring, 
 
 Iowa City, Iowa. 
 Dear-Sir : 
 
 I-was-much pleased to-receive your-letter 25 of-recent-date. 
 I-am still in the-same business in-which I-was engaged 
 when-you were here. The-only change in the-business 50 
 is-that I-am now sole proprietor, having recently bought 
 out the-parties formerly interested with-me. 
 
 I-send-you to-day our new catalogue. 75 I-beg to-call 
 your attention to-several very important improvements we- 
 have made in our churns. These are all fully explained 
 in the-catalogue. 100 I-am sure our churn would please Mr. 
 Patterson. I-shall wait until I hear from-you again before- 
 writing him direct. I-hope-you 125 may-be able-to persuade- 
 him to-place an-order with us. In-case-you succeed, I-shall 
 of-course, be-pleased to allow-you 150 the-regular twenty per 
 cent, commission which we allow our agents. 
 
178 PITMANIC 
 
 If-you-afe in the-hardware business, as your letter-head 
 indicates, would-it 175 not be possible for-you to-take the- 
 agency for our churns in Iowa City, Iowa? We-are now 
 making a-small churn especially for 200 family use among 
 farmers. They-are taking wonderfully well. I-would ask 
 your attention to-this churn, number 7, in the-catalogue 
 sent-you to-day. 225 I-am sure there-is money in-it for-you. 
 
 Respectfully, 
 
 John Young. 238 
 
 ii. Translation. 
 
 LESSON XLVII. 
 
 AFFIXES. 
 
 i. There are a number of endings, or affixes, of frequent 
 occurrence which, like the prefixes, are represented by ab- 
 breviated signs. They are as follows : 
 
 ( T ) The endings ful, bel, bal and ble are represented 
 by the simple letters ef and be, when it is inconvenient to 
 modify these letters with the 1-hook, as in forcible, distaste- 
 ful, ostensible, wasteful. 
 
SHORTHAND 179 
 
 (2) The ending ship is represented by either ish or 
 shay as in township, governorship. It is allowable to dis- 
 join the ish or shay used for the ending ship when neither 
 will make a distinct angle with the preceding letter. Since 
 either the upward or downward stroke may be written, it 
 is seldom necessary to disjoin the letter used for this ending. 
 
 (3) A dot for ing is used when it is inconvenient to 
 join the stroke ing at the end of words as in resting, hoist- 
 ing. 
 
 (4) In similar outlines the ending ings is likewise diffi- 
 cult to join. In such cases a dash is used, as in castings. 
 The dash used for this purpose is written at right angles to 
 the stroke at the end- of which it is placed. The student 
 should bear in mind that the dot and dash for the endings 
 ing and ings should never be used except when it is not 
 convenient to use the stroke ing since a joined letter is al- 
 ways more quickly written than one that is disjoined. 
 
 (5) An s-circle is used to represent the ending self and 
 a ses-circle for selves, as in myself, yourself, themselves. 
 
 (6) A de is used at the end of words for the ending 
 hood, as in manhood, childhood. 
 
 (7) The wordsign for ever, is used for the ending ever 
 in such words as whenever. 
 
 (8) The s-circle is used for so when it occurs before 
 the ending ever in such words as whensoever. 
 
 (9) The endings ility, ality and arity are not written 
 but are indicated by disjoining from the first part of the 
 outline the letter immediately preceding the endings, as in 
 hospitality, excitability, disparity. 
 
 2. These affixes are illustrated in the following words : 
 
 forcible distasteful township governorship resting casting myself 
 
i8o PITMANIC 
 
 themselves disparity hospitality excitability manhood whensoever 
 
 EXERCISE 47. 
 
 Using the proper endings write the following words: 
 
 3. List Words. (52 i :3o.) 
 
 i Admissible, 2 permissible, 3 accessible, 4 ostensible, 
 5 surmountable, 6 cannibal, 7 tasteful, 8 graceful, 9 citizen- 
 ship, 10 wardenship, n deanship, 12 warship, 13 lordship, 
 14 township, 15 rusting, 16 rafting, 17 roofing, 18 resting, 
 19 .casting, 20 himself, 21 thyself, 22 myself, 23 yourself, 
 24 themselves, 25 ourselves, 26 yourselves, 27 itself, 28 re- 
 liability, 29 debility, 30 visibility, 31 feasibility, 32 instru- 
 mentality, 33 vitality, 34 mentality, 35 frugality, 36 brutality, 
 37 individuality, 38 fatality, 39 popularity, 40 familiarity, 
 41 disparity, 42 polarity, 43 stability, 44 futility, 45 admissi- 
 bility, 46 inadmissibility, 47 unfamiliarity, 48 inhospitality, 
 49 formality, 50 informality, 51 instability, 52 potentiality. 
 
 4. Wordsigns. 
 
 there- which-ought- which-have- which-would- which-are- such 
 
 would-not to-have-had had have-had not ought-to- 
 
 have-had 
 
 such-have- such-would- posterity postscript people-of- particular partake 
 had have-had God 
 
 political or-not onward opportunity on-th- on-either- on-the-other- 
 
 one-hand hand hand 
 
 5. Phrases. (60 i :oo.) 
 
 i Such-a-temperament, 2 in-his-posterity, 3 in-a-post- 
 
SHORTHAND 181 
 
 script, 4 was-very-particular, 5 a-new-part, 6 in-that-part, 
 7 will-partake, 8 political-influence, 9 he-keeps-onward, 25 
 10 a-great-opportunity, n a-poor-casting, 12 was-accessible, 
 13 saw-a-cannibal, 14 offered-the-deanship, 15 worship-the- 
 king, 1 6 over-the-township, 17 take-it-himself, 18 go-them- 
 selves, 50 19 the-wardenship-cases, 20 will-take-it-himself, 
 21 will-worship-him. 00 
 
 6. Letter. (84 i :2o.) 
 
 Lexington, Ky., Jan. I, 1904. 
 John Phillips, 
 
 Detroit, Mich. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 Will-you please send to-me at-once a-catalogue 25 of-your 
 various styles of show-cases. I-am-preparing to open a- 
 jewelry store in-this city in-a-short-time and-shall want 50 
 several cases especially for-this line of business. 
 
 With-your catalogue be-sure to name discounts for cash 
 with order. A-prompt reply will confer 75 a-favor. I-am, 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Thomas Ackerson. 84 
 
 7. Letter. (125 2:00.) 
 
 Denver, Colorado, Dec.3i, 1903. 
 Pingree & Smith, 
 
 Detroit, Mich. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 Your Western representative called yesterday. Unfortu- 
 nately I-was out-of 25 the-city and-hence was-unable-to give- 
 him a-small order I-had decided to-place with-your house. 
 As-your agent may-not 50 be-here again in-time for-you to- 
 get the-order through-him and-have the-stock shipped not 
 later-than February ist, I-have 75 decided to-send the-order 
 direct. 
 
182 PITMANIC 
 
 You-may ship-me on or before February ist ten cases of- 
 your composite shoe, assorted sizes from No. 100 three to 
 six, divided as-you usually do as-to widths. I-desire these 
 sent with draft, March ist, thirty -days. 
 
 Respectfully-yours, 
 
 John Morton. 123 
 
 8. Letter. (106 1:45.) 
 
 Detroit, Mich., Jan. 5, 19x34. 
 Mr. John Morton, 
 
 Denver, Colorado. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 We-have your valued order of Dec. 3i. 2r> The same shall- 
 have our most careful attention. The-terms you-mention 
 are-entirely satisfactory to us. 
 
 We regret that-you were-not at-home r>0 when-our Mr. 
 Sanders called. He-had a-number of new styles of shoes 
 which we-were very anxious for-you to see. We-think 75 
 they-are especially fine. We-are sure you would have-been 
 pleased with-them and-would have-placed at-least a-small 
 order with Mr. 100 Sanders. 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 
 Pingree & Smith. 106 
 
 9. Translation. 
 
SHORTHAND 183 
 
 LESSON XLVIII. 
 
 PUNCTUATION. 
 
 1. As a rule very few, if any, marks of punctuation are 
 used in Shorthand work, especially in rapid reporting. 
 
 2. When, however, time permits the insertion of the 
 more important ones, it is best to write them, since it makes 
 the transcription easier. 
 
 3. The punctuation marks made use of in reporting are 
 as follows : 
 
 (1) The period is represented (a) by a small cross, 
 (b) by a double length chay written more nearly perpen- 
 dicular than chay usually is. A period may also be indi- 
 cated (c) by leaving a blank space of fully an inch or 
 more. 
 
 (2) The comma, colon, and semicolon are the same 
 as in longhand. 
 
 (3) A dash is indicated by a waving line from a quar- 
 ter to a half inch long. 
 
 (4) Parentheses and brackets are the same as in long- 
 hand except that double dashes are struck through them. 
 
 * (5) A hyphen is represented by a double instead of a 
 single dash as in longhand. 
 
 (6) An interrogation is best represented by the sign 
 for what joined to and followed by a double length chay. 
 
 (7) A quotation is represented by two signs for or 
 written side by side and closely together. 
 
 4. Italicized and capitalized words and expressions are 
 indicated by a single line beneath words to be italicized and 
 a double line beneath words to be written in capitals. 
 
 5. The following illustrations show the marks of punc- 
 tuation described above : 
 
184 PITMANIC 
 
 f > f * - / 
 
 6. Initial letters are written as follows : 
 
 \)Ti __ y/--/^^.\ 
 
 ABCDEFGHIJKL M N OP Q RS TUVW X Y Z 
 
 7. The outline for after is omitted when the word occurs 
 between repeated words as day after day, week after week, 
 year after year, man after man. In such cases the word 
 after is indicated by writing the outlines for the words pre- 
 ceding and following it near together, ( the second being 
 placed a little below the first. 
 
 8. In expressions from one thing to another as, from 
 place to place, from time to time, from door to door, etc., 
 the outlines for the words from and to are usually omitted, 
 they being indicated by placing the outlines for the re- 
 peated words side by side and near to each other. 
 
 9. The words, of the, are usually omitted in very rapid 
 reporting, they being indicated by placing the outlines for 
 the preceding and following words near to each other, as 
 in king-of-the-Greeks. 
 
 10. No confusion need arise by the same method being 
 adopted to represent both from-to and of-the, since with 
 from-to a repeated word is used while with of-the two dif- 
 ferent words must be used. 
 
 11. The word company, when used immediately follow- 
 ing the name of the company, is indicated by writing the 
 letter kay across the last letter in the outline immediately 
 preceding as in Central-Mills-Company. The words asso- 
 ciation and society are expressed in a similar way, the for- 
 mer by writing ish and the latter by writing es through the 
 
SHORTHAND 185 
 
 last letter of the preceding word, as in University Oratori- 
 cal-Association and Emerson Literary-Society. 
 
 12. When the letter immediately preceding the kay, ish 
 or es is made in the same direction as the letter which must 
 be struck across it, the first preceding letter made in a dif- 
 ferent direction must be the one selected across which to 
 write the ish, kay or es. 
 
 13. These general methods of abbreviation are illus- 
 trated as follows : 
 
 day-after- from- King-of- Central Mills- Emerson Literary- University 
 
 day place- the-Greeks Co Society Oratorical- 
 
 to-place Association 
 
 EXERCISE 48. 
 14. Wordsigns. 
 
 at-all-times afterwards advance- Word- prosperity profit malpractice 
 ment of-God prophet 
 
 landlord intelligible it-ought in-the- in-order- Inter- in-the- 
 
 world that change second-place 
 
 15. Phrases. (60 i :oo.) 
 
 i From-city-to-city, 2 from-house-to-house, 3 tree-after- 
 tree, 4 book-after-book, 5 window-after-window, 6 from- 
 room-to-room, 7 from-lamp-to-lamp, 25 8 from-chair-to-chair, 
 9 day-of-the-week, 10 hour-after-hour, n result-of-the-ac- 
 tion, 12 desk-after-desk, 13 policy-of-the-governor, 14 De- 
 troit Publishing-Company, 50 15 National Engraving- Asso- 
 ciation, 16 National Shorthand-Society, i/New-York Car- 
 bon-Company. 00 
 
186 PITMANIC 
 
 16. Letter. (150 2:30.) 
 
 New Albany, Ind., May 15, 1904. 
 Mr. John Phillips, 
 
 Detroit, Mich. 
 Dear-Sir : 
 
 In-reply-to your letter of May I2. 25 We cannot-possibly 
 ship-yon before June I, the-special size bevel-edge glass 
 for show-cases you-are making. We-have a-very large 
 rush order of-special sizes for-a New- York dealer who-is 
 a-heavy purchaser. We cannot therefore drop this and-take- 
 up your order 75 before May 26. This-will enable us-to for- 
 ward-same by June i. We-hope this-will be-satisfactory. 
 It does' not-often happen 100 that-we-are unable-to give-your 
 special orders our immediate attention. Please-to-let us 
 know at-once whether you-can wait that-long 125 and-if so, 
 we-will make-special arrangements to-get the-order out on 
 the-date mentioned. We-are, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 Indiana Plate-Glass-Co. 150 
 
 17. Letter. (179 3:00.) 
 
 Detroit, Mich., May 16, 1904. 
 
 Indiana Plate-Glass-Co., 
 
 New Albany, Ind. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 I-have just received your letter of yesterday. 25 I-have 
 wired party for-whom I-have the-order for cases, special 
 size glass for-which you-have my order under-date of May 50 
 12. He-replies that-he-has advertised quite extensively and- 
 at great expense, to open on June 15, and-that he-must- 
 have 75 cases by June 10. Now, if-you-can fill my order, 
 shipping same by-express on June i, it-will give-me six- 
 days 100 to-fit-up the-cases after the-plate arrives and-allow 
 
SHORTHAND 187 
 
 three-days for-delivery. This gives but-very narrow mar- 
 gin. You-may, however, go 125 on-with the-work. I-shall 
 expect to-receive the-plate by-express on June 2, without 
 fail. I-would much-rather lose on-this lr>0 job than-to disap- 
 point this patron who-is one-of-my best customers. 
 
 Please to-have your manager give-this special order his 
 personal attention. 17 '"' 
 
 Respectfully-yours, 
 
 John Phillips. 179 " 
 
 1 8. Translation. 
 
 .0 
 < 
 
 J r 
 
 ^ ^J> 
 
 LESSON XLIX. 
 
 MINOR PRINCIPLES. 
 
 i. In derived words, the general rule is to add such 
 strokes, hooks or circles to the outline for the primitive as 
 may be necessary to represent the derivative. For example 
 the derived word saying is written by adding ing to es, 
 the outline for the primitive say. The reporter usually 
 makes many exceptions to this rule when by so doing speed 
 may be gained and the shorter outline is legible. This is 
 
188 PITMANIC 
 
 especially true where the primitive has a somewhat modified 
 form and pronunciation in the derivative as in written 
 which has the outline ret-en instead of ray-te-en, which 
 would be the full outline for write with the en added. 
 
 2. Where a primitive is represented by a wordsign the 
 derivative is formed by prefixing or affixing the necessary 
 characters to the wordsign. For example, endanger would 
 be written en-jer. 
 
 3. In compound words the proper outlines for each 
 word are usually united without modification. In case a 
 poor angle results they may be disjoined, in which case the 
 outlines for the two parts are written near each other. 
 
 4. It may be necessary to vary any rule relative to the 
 formation of outlines : ( I ) When clearness makes it neces- 
 sary to secure distinct angles; (2) When it is clearly evi- 
 dent that more easily written outlines may thereby be 
 secured without loss of angularity or without causing am- 
 biguity. 
 
 5. Ordinarily, outlines for words which should be capi- 
 talized are not underscored when fully vocalized. Instances 
 may occur, however, when both a proper and a common 
 noun are written and pronounced alike and where, in a sen- 
 tence, either would make complete sense, as for example : 
 "He was living in the Brown (brown) house." In such 
 a case an underscore beneath the outline for brown would 
 indicate that the name Brown was meant, if such were the 
 case ; while if merely the color brown were meant, no un- 
 derscore would be needed. The full vocalization of the 
 outline would not obviate the difficulty. 
 
 6. In all kinds of reporting, the first time a proper name 
 occurs, unless it is a very common one, it should be spelled 
 out in longhand. After that, when it occurs in the same 
 
SHORTHAND 189 
 
 letter or report, it may be written in Shorthand. The long- 
 hand will give the proper spelling and the Shorthand the 
 correct pronunciation. For example, in the name Beau- 
 champ, (pronounced Beecham), the Shorthand would give 
 no intimation of the unusual spelling, while the spelling 
 would not indicate the pronunciation. 
 
 7. In such words as moral and immoral, mortal and 
 immortal, etc., where the outline and the accented vowel 
 are the same for both the positive and negative forms it is 
 necessary to insert an initial vowel in the outline for the 
 negative word. 
 
 8. In writing proper names in Shorthand it is advisable 
 not to write the outlines too briefly. In such words the 
 outlines should always be full enough so that, if need be, 
 the word may be completely vocalized. 
 
 9. Experienced reporters frequently adopt abbreviated 
 outlines for words and phrases of common occurrence in 
 the business in which they are engaged. Beginners should 
 not attempt anything of this sort. Such special abbrevia- 
 tions may be learned to advantage only after one becomes 
 familiar with the peculiar terms common to the business in 
 which he may be employed. As very few Shorthand stu- 
 dents have any idea what line of work they will take up, 
 one cannot familiarize himself with the specially contracted 
 words and phrases which he will need later on. 
 
 10. Wordsigns. 
 
 in-order-to in-regard-to infinite intelli- it-ought- it-had-not it-ought-to- 
 
 gent not it- would -not have-had 
 
 to-night at-hand 
 
 it-wou!d it-will it-will in-point- in-his- i<mag- ladies- which- which- 
 have-had not hava-had of-fact secret ined and- were- will- 
 gentle- not not 
 men 
 
190 PITMANIC 
 
 EXERCISE 49. 
 
 11. Phrases. (601:00.) 
 
 I In-order-to-go-there, 2 in-regard-to-my-opinion, 3 he- 
 was-intelligent, 4 in-his-infinite-love, 5 an-infinite-being, 
 6 it-will-have-had-enough, 25 7 it-will-have-had-ten, 8 it-will- 
 not-do-so, 9 it-will-not-take-any-time, 10 it-will-not-take- 
 notice, n in-his-secret-doings, 50 12 in-his-secret-influence, 
 1 3 it-ought-to-have-had-occasion. 60 
 
 12. Letter. (400 6:30.) 
 
 Manistee, Mich., August n, 1904. 
 
 Miss Mattie Allison, 
 
 Ann Arbor, Michigan. 
 Dear Miss Allison : 
 
 I-had the-pleasure of a-visit 25 from-your brother last even- 
 ing. Henry told-me that-he-had just heard from-you and- 
 you had written him how-you were getting along 50 at-the 
 Stenographic Institute. From what he-said I-judge that- 
 you have-just-had the-last lesson in-your text-book and- 
 would begin 75 a-review next week. I-think you-have done 
 remarkably well to-have completed the-lessons so soon. I- 
 know your text-book is much 100 simpler than the-one I- 
 studied. This no-doubt makes the-work considerably easier. 
 
 What I-had especially in mind when I-began this letter 125 
 was to-impress upon you the-necessity of committing the 
 Wordsigns very thoroughly. Although our teacher told-us 
 over-and-over-again to-do this, 150 we students did-not real- 
 ize of how much-importance this was until after-we-had 
 taken-positions. Then I-found that I-had thoughtlessly 
 neglected 175 one-of the-important-parts of Shorthand. An- 
 other-thing to-which I-did-not give-enough-attention was 
 practice. There were-several girls in-our 200 class and-we 
 
SHORTHAND 191 
 
 often wasted in-gossip hours which should-have-been given 
 to-earnest practice. I-know-that I-might have completed 
 the- work- 25 several weeks sooner had-it not been for- 
 this. I-know yon-have an-excellent teacher, but no matter 
 how-good-the instruction you-cannot 250 hope tormake a- 
 success unless you, yourself, do-some hard work. You- will 
 pardon me for-being so-very plain. I-only wish someone 275 
 in-whom I -had confidence bad-written me thus while I-was 
 in-school. Having-taken the-course at-which you-are now 
 at work 300 and-then having-gone directly to-work as-an- 
 amanuensis, I-feel that I-am in-a-position to-talk to-you in- 
 a-manner 25 that-will-be of benefit to-you. Still I-probably 
 should-not write-thus plainly if I-did-not know-you to-be 
 a-sensible 330 girl and-would take-this in-the-right spirit. 
 I -would be-pleased to-hear from-you from-time-to-time as- 
 your work progresses. 375 When-you finish-the-course I- 
 think I-can be of-some assistance to-you in securing you a- 
 position. Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Florence- Jennings. 400 
 13. Translation. 
 
192 PITMANIC 
 
 LESSON L. 
 
 REVIEW. 
 
 i. QUESTIONS: 
 
 (1) What prefixes are represented by dots? 
 
 (2) Give two examples of each. 
 
 (3) What prefixes are represented by the s-circle? 
 
 (4) Give two examples of each. 
 
 (5) What prefixes are represented by a slanting tick? 
 
 (6) Is the tick joined to what folows? 
 
 (7) In what direction does the tick slant? 
 
 (8) What prefix does the disjoined em represent? 
 
 (9) Give two examples. 
 
 (10) What prefixes are represented by a joined half 
 length en? 
 
 ( 1 1 ) Give an example of each. 
 
 (12) How is the prefix post written? 
 
 (13) How are con, com and cog represented when 
 they occur between two other consonants in a word ? 
 
 ( 14) Is it wise for a beginner to sometimes omit the 
 prefix for con, com and cog? 
 
 (15) When a word ends in ble, bel, bal or ful and it 
 is not convenient to use the 1-hook, how are these endings 
 written ? 
 
 (16) How is the ending ship represented? 
 
 (17) Is it ever allowable to disjoin the character used 
 to represent this ending? 
 
 (18) How is the ending ing sometimes written? 
 
 (19) In what cases only is it allowable to use the 
 dot for the ending ing? 
 
 (20) In similar cases, where we have the ending ings, 
 how is it written? 
 
SHORTHAND 193 
 
 (21) Give examples of the proper use of the special 
 signs for the endings ing and ings. 
 
 (22) How are the endings self and selves written? 
 
 (23) Give two examples of each. 
 
 (24) How is the ending hood written? 
 
 (25) Give two illustrations. 
 
 (26) How is the ending ever written? 
 
 (27) When the syllable so precedes the ending ever 
 how is it written ? 
 
 (28) Give two examples each of the use of the ending 
 ever and the use of the s-circle for so. 
 
 (29) How are the endings ility, arity and ality rep- 
 resented ? 
 
 (30) Are the marks of punctuation generally written 
 in reporting? 
 
 (31) In what three ways may the period be repre- 
 sented in Shorthand? 
 
 (32) When used, how are the comma, semicolon 
 and colon written? 
 
 (33) How is the dash written in Shorthand? 
 
 (34) In what way do parentheses and brackets in 
 Shorthand differ from those in longhand? 
 
 (35) How is the Shorthand hyphen written? 
 
 (36) How is a question indicated in Shorthand? 
 
 (37) How are capitalized and italicized words indi- 
 cated ? 
 
 (38) Give the alphabet in Shorthand. 
 
 (39) How are from and to indicated when used in 
 an expression from one thing to another? 
 
 (40) How is of the indicated in certain cases? 
 
 (41) How are the words company, association and 
 society sometimes written? 
 
194 PITMANIC 
 
 (42) How are the outlines for derived words formed? 
 (43.) If a primitive is represented by a wordsign 
 how is a word derived' from the primitive written? 
 
 (44) Is it ever necessary to underscore proper names 
 when fully vocalized? 
 
 (45) When should a proper name be written out in 
 longhand ? 
 
 (46) When an affirmative and negative have the 
 same outline how is the negative indicated ? 
 
 (47) Should every possible contraction be .used in 
 outlines for proper names? 
 
 (48) Is it advisable for the student to learn abbrevia- 
 tions used only in special lines of business? 
 
 EXERCISE 50. 
 
 2. List Words. (30 145.) 
 
 Contemplate construe anticipation circumference recom- 
 pense companion counterpoise postman interval recognize 
 inconsistent concern unconscious conversion contemplation 
 permissible cannibal wardenship rusting himself yourselves 
 reliability instrumentality mentality brutality 25 popularity 
 familiarity admissibility inhospitality instability. 30 
 
 3. Wordsigns. 
 
 As-great-as, able-to, at-any-rate, able-to-give-it, at-all-its, 
 constructive, conseqitence, .consequent, Consequential, com- 
 prehend, comprehension, consider, consideration, confiden- 
 tial, calculate, great-extent, greater-than, Great-Britain, 
 heretofore, hesitate, human-nature, intellect, intelligence, in- 
 competent, part, (party,) individual, there-would-not, which- 
 ought-to-have-had, which-have-.had, which- would-have-had, 
 which-are-not, such-ought-to-have-had, such-have-had, 
 such-wonld-have-had, posterity, postscript, people-of- 
 God, particular, partake, political, or-not, onward,^ 
 
SHORTHAND 195 
 
 opportunity, on-the-one-hand, on-either-hand, on-the-other- 
 hand, at-all-times, afterwards, advancement, Word-of-God, 
 prosperity, profit, (prophet,) malpractice, landlord, intelli- 
 gible, it-ought, in-the-world, in-order-that, interchange, in- 
 the-se'cond-place, in-order-to, in-regard-to, infinite, intelli- 
 gent, it-ought-not, (to-night,) it-had-not, (it-would-not, at- 
 hand,) it-ought-to-have-had, it-would-have-hacl, it-\vill-not, 
 it-will-have-had, in-point-of-fact. in-his-secret, imagined, 
 ladies-and-gentlemen, which- were-not, which- will-not. 
 
 4. Phrases, (in 1:50.) 
 
 As-great-as-can-be abie-to-call was-able-to was-at-all-its 
 they-will-calculate-it greatef-than-any was-human-nature'- >n 
 strong-intellect very-great-extcnt such-a-temperamcnt in-a- 
 postscript a-new-party will-partake he-keeps-onward a-poor- 
 casting saw-a-cannibal r ' worship-the-king take-it-himself 
 1-will-take-it-myself from-city-to-city tree-after-tree win- 
 do w-after-window irom-room-to-room" from-chair-to-chair 
 hour-after-hour National Engraving-Association in-order- 
 to-go-there he-was-intelligent an-infinite-being it-will-have- 
 had 1 " it-will-not-take-any it-ought-to-have-had-occasion. 111 
 
 5. Letter. (1672:45.) 
 
 Iowa City, Iowa, May n, 1904. 
 Mr. John Young, 
 
 Springfield, 111. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 Are-you still engaged in the-manufacture 25 of-rotary 
 churns? A-gentleman in-this city has recently purchased 
 a-large dairy-farm near here and-intends to-go into the-but- 
 ter-making 50 business very largely. 
 
 Since learning of-this yesterday it-has occurred to-me 
 that the-rotary churn which-you were manufacturing when- 
 I-was in 75 Springfield would-be just the-thing for-him. If- 
 
196 PITMANIC 
 
 you are still interested in-this business, send me your de- 
 scriptive catalogue and-I-will place 100 it in the-hands of 
 the-aforesaid gentleman and-at the-same time personally 
 urge-him to adopt the-churn you-are making. Knowing 
 what 1 - 5 I-do of-it, I-am sure it-would pleas^-him. If-you- 
 like you-might also write the-gentleman direct. His name 
 is Henry 150 Patterson, and-mail will reach-him addressed 
 simply, Iowa City, Iowa. I-am, 
 
 Sincerely-yours, 
 
 John Elfring. 107 
 
 6. Letter. (84 1 120.) 
 
 Lexington, Ky., Jan. I, 1904. 
 John Phillips, 
 
 Detroit, Mich. 
 My-Dear-Sir : 
 
 Will-you please send to-me at-once a-catalogue 2r> of-your 
 various styles of show-cases. I-am-preparing to open a- 
 jewelry store in-this city in-a-short-time and-shall want 50 
 several cases especially for-this line of business. . 
 
 With-your catalogue be-sure to name discounts for cash 
 with order. A-prompt reply will confer 75 -a-favor. I-am, 
 
 Very-truly-yours, 
 
 Thomas Ackerson. 84 
 
 7. Letter. (150 2:30.) 
 
 New Albany, Ind., May 15, 1904. 
 Mr. John Phillips, 
 
 Detroit, Mich. 
 Dear-Sir : 
 
 In-reply-to your letter of May I2. 25 We cannot-possibly 
 ship-you before June i, the-special size bevel-edge glass 
 for show-cases you-are making. We-have a-very large 50 
 rush order of-special sizes for-a New- York dealer who-is 
 a-heavy purchaser. We cannot therefore drop this and-take- 
 
SHORTHAND 197 
 
 up your order 75 before May 26. This-will enable us-to for- 
 ward-same by June i. We-hope this- will be-satisfactory. 
 It does not-often happen 100 that-we-are unable-to give-your 
 special orders our immediate attention. Please-to-let us 
 know at-once whether you-can wait that-long 125 and-if so, 
 we-will make-special arrangements to-get the-order out on 
 the-date mentioned. We-are, 
 
 Yours-truly, 
 Indiana Plate-Glass-Co. 150 
 
 8. Letter. (179 3:00.) 
 
 Detroit, Mich., May 16, 1904. 
 Indiana Plate-Glass-Co., 
 
 New Albany, Ind. 
 Gentlemen : 
 
 I-have just received your letter of yesterday. 25 I-have 
 wired party for-whom I-have the-order for cases, special 
 size glass for-which you-have my order under-date of May 50 
 12. He-replies that-he-has advertised quite extensively and- 
 at great expense, to open on June 15, and-that he-must- 
 have 75 cases by June 10. Now, if-you-can fill my order, 
 shipping same by-express on June I, it-will give-me six- 
 days 100 to-fit-up the-cases after the-plate arrives and-allow 
 three-days for-delivery. This gives but-very narrow mar- 
 gin. You-may, however, go 125 on-with the-work. I-shall 
 expect to-receive the-plate by-express on June 2, without 
 fail. I-would much-rather lose on-this 150 job than-to disap- 
 point this patron who-is one-of-my best customers. 
 
 Please to-have your manager give-this special order his 
 
 personal attention. 175 
 
 Respectfully-yours, 
 
 John Phillips. 179 
 
WORDSIGNS. 
 
 C' 
 
 able-to 
 able-to-givi-it 
 
 about 
 
 according 
 
 aceording-to 
 
 accuracy 
 accurate 
 acknowledge 
 
 acquit 
 
 Ai-t-of-congress 
 
 acute 
 
 advancement 
 
 advantage 
 
 advantageous 
 
 advertise 
 
 :ised 
 advertisement 
 
 advertising 
 
 after 
 
 afternoon 
 
 afterwards 
 
 again-and-again 
 
 ah 
 
 all 
 
 all-the-world 
 
 almighty 
 
 already 
 always 
 A. M. 
 
 America 
 
 an 
 
 and 
 
 angel 
 
 another-one 
 
 any 
 
 any-other 
 anywhere 
 appear 
 
 as-great-as 
 
 as-has 
 as-is 
 
 as-it 
 
 as-it-were 
 
 associate 
 
 as-soon-as 
 
 'astonish 
 
 ;ished 
 astonishment 
 
 as-well-as 
 at-an-events 
 
 at-all-its 
 
 at-all-times 
 
 at-any-rate 
 
 at -first 
 at-hand 
 
 at-k 
 
 a,t-Iength 
 
 at-once 
 
 at-the-first 
 
 aware 
 awe 
 
 awhile 
 
 aye 
 
 Baptist 
 
 because 
 
 become 
 
 before 
 
 before-hand 
 
 began 
 beg-in 
 begun 
 
 behalf 
 beheld 
 
 behold 
 
 belief 
 
 believe 
 
 belong 
 
 belonged 
 
 beneficial 
 
 benevolence 
 
 benevolent 
 
 be-not 
 
 better-than 
 
 beyond 
 
 brother 
 
 but 
 
 by-the-first 
 
 by-way-of-illustration 
 
13 
 
 i-annot 
 
 capa&le 
 
 care 
 
 careful 
 
 carefully 
 
 Catholic 
 
 challenge 
 change > 
 
 chapter 
 
 character 
 
 child 
 
 Children 
 
 Christian 
 
 Christianity 
 
 circulate 
 
 circumstance 
 
 circumstances 
 
 circumstantial 
 
 circumstances-of-the-case 
 
 C. O. D. 
 
 collect 
 
 collective 
 
 collectively 
 
 come 
 
 commercial 
 
 common 
 
 company 
 
 comply 
 
 comprehend 
 
 comprehension 
 
 confession 
 
 confidential 
 
 connection 
 
 connective 
 
 consecutive 
 
 consecutively 
 
 consequence 
 
 consequent 
 
 consequential 
 
 consider 
 consideration 
 Const! tut ion -of-the- 
 United-States 
 
 
 
 < o-operate 
 
 correct 
 
 cross-examination 
 
 cross-examine 
 
 cure 
 
 danger 
 
 dare-not 
 
 dark 
 
 darken 
 
 darkens 
 
 darkness 
 
 dear 
 
 Dear-Sir 
 
 December 
 
 degree 
 
 deliberation 
 delight 
 ..4... deliver 
 
 deliverance 
 delivered 
 delivery 
 
 denominate 
 
 denomination 
 
 denominational 
 
 derivative 
 
 derive 
 
 describe 
 
 descriptive 
 destruction 
 determination 
 
 determine 
 
 develop 
 
 developed 
 
 development 
 
 did-not 
 
 differ 
 
 differed 
 
 difference 
 
 different 
 
 difficult 
 
 difficulty 
 
 dignity 
 
 disadvantage 
 
 disagree 
 
 disappear 
 
 dissatisfaction 
 
 doctor 
 
 doctrtne 
 
 do-it 
 
 dollar 
 
 domestic 
 
 do-not 
 
 downward 
 
 during 
 
 each-will 
 
 each-will-have 
 
 east-and-wes* 
 
 efficient 
 electric 
 electricity 
 
 .L 
 
 L C. 
 
especial 
 especially 
 
 :ial 
 laHy 
 
 establish 
 
 es-tablished 
 
 establishment 
 
 etc. 
 
 Kurope 
 
 European 
 
 ever 
 
 ever-and-ever 
 
 i ing 
 everlasting-life 
 
 every 
 
 -one 
 
 examination 
 
 exchange 
 
 expect 
 
 expected 
 
 experience 
 
 explanation 
 
 express 
 
 expression 
 
 external 
 
 extraordinary 
 
 eye 
 fact 
 failure 
 
 faithful 
 
 faithfully 
 
 falsehood 
 
 familiar 
 
 fear-of-God 
 
 featuie 
 
 February 
 figurative 
 figuratively 
 
 first 
 
 follow 
 
 for 
 
 for-ever-and-ever 
 
 forgive 
 
 for-instance 
 
 for-it 
 
 forsake 
 
 for-the-first-time 
 
 for-the-most-rart 
 for-the-purpose-of 
 for-the-sake-of 
 
 forthwith 
 forward 
 
 
 
 ;.-...!. 
 
 \ 
 
 L 
 
 ..\n .. 
 
 from-flrst-to-1 
 from-lt 
 
 future 
 
 gave-it 
 general 
 generally 
 
 generation 
 
 n-.an 
 gentlemen 
 
 give 
 
 give-it 
 given 
 
 givc-s-us 
 
 glory 
 
 glorious 
 
 good-and-bad 
 govei n 
 
 governed 
 
 government 
 
 governor 
 
 Great-Britain 
 
 greater-than 
 
 great-extent. 
 guilt 
 
 guilty 
 
 had 
 
 had-lt 
 
 half 
 hand 
 hand-in-hand 
 
 handsome 
 
 hand-writing 
 
 happen 
 
 happiness 
 
 happy 
 
 hard 
 
 hardware 
 has 
 
 has-his 
 
 hath 
 have 
 have-had 
 
 have-It 
 
 have-not 
 hazard 
 
 he 
 
 health 
 
 hear 
 
 heard 
 heart 
 heathen 
 
 Heaven 
 
 height 
 
 held 
 
 
 ( -^ 
 
 
PI I 
 
 help 
 
 hence 
 
 her 
 
 here 
 
 herein 
 
 here-to-fore 
 
 hesitate 
 
 high 
 
 higher 
 
 highly 
 highway 
 him , 
 
 his 
 
 his-has 
 
 his-is 
 
 historian 
 
 history 
 
 hol-d 
 
 holiness 
 
 holy 
 
 home 
 
 honor 
 
 honorable 
 
 hope 
 
 how 
 
 however 
 
 howsoever 
 
 human 
 
 human-life 
 
 human-nature 
 
 humble 
 humor 
 hundred 
 
 I 
 
 idea 
 if-it 
 
 illegible 
 Imagine 
 imagined 
 
 immediate 
 
 immediately 
 
 importance 
 
 important 
 impossible 
 improve 
 
 improved 
 
 improvement 
 
 in 
 
 inaccurate 
 
 in-as-many 
 
 inclination 
 
 income 
 
 Incompetent 
 
 individual 
 
 *\ 
 
 .^L 
 
 \ 
 
 ^ 
 
 1. 
 
 inductive 
 
 inductively 
 
 infinite 
 
 influence 
 
 influential 
 
 information 
 
 in-his-description 
 in-his-exi>erience 
 in-his-expression 
 
 in-has-secret 
 
 in-his-situation 
 
 in-his-usual 
 
 in-order-ithat 
 
 in-order-to 
 
 in-point-of-fact 
 
 Inquiry 
 
 in-j-eference-to 
 
 in-regard-to 
 
 in-reply-to 
 
 in-respect-to 
 
 in-response-to 
 
 in-seeming 
 
 insignificant 
 
 in-some 
 
 intellect 
 
 intelligible 
 
 Intelligence 
 
 intelligent 
 
 interchange 
 
 in-the-seeond-place 
 
 in -the- world 
 
 invention 
 
 irregular 
 
 Is 
 
 is-as 
 
 is-hls 
 
 ls-lt 
 
 is-said 
 
 is-said-to-have 
 
 is-seen 
 ds-such 
 it-had 
 
 It-'had-not 
 
 it-ought 
 
 it-ought-not 
 
 it-ough t- to-havo 
 
 it-ought-to-'have-had 
 
 it-will 
 
 it-will-have 
 
 it-will-have-had 
 
 it-wlll-not 
 
 it-would 
 
 it-would-have 
 
 it-would-have-had 
 
I ,T K I. 
 
 JVI 1ST O 
 
 it-would-not 
 January 
 
 Jesus-Christ 
 
 junior 
 
 just-been 
 
 just-come 
 
 just-had 
 
 justice-of-the-peace 
 
 just-what 
 
 knowledge 
 
 ladies-and-gentlemen 
 
 landlord 
 
 /anguage 
 
 large 
 
 larger 
 
 larger- than 
 
 later-than 
 
 laws-of-health 
 
 laws-of-'life 
 
 lawver 
 
 legible 
 
 legislative 
 
 liberal 
 
 liberty 
 
 liberty-of-'the-'peop'lfc 
 
 liberty-of-the-press 
 
 longer-than 
 
 Lord 
 
 Lord- Jesus- Christ 
 
 loves-us , 
 
 magazine 
 
 magnificence 
 
 magnificent 
 
 majority 
 
 malpractice 
 
 manner 
 
 manuscript 
 
 may-as-well 
 
 may-be 
 
 may-not 
 measure 
 member 
 
 membe.r-of-congress 
 
 member-of-the-legislature 
 
 merciful 
 
 rnercy 
 mere 
 
 messenger 
 
 minority 
 mistake 
 more 
 
 more-or-less 
 
 more-than 
 
 mortgage 
 
 most-important 
 
 most-likely 
 
 mostly 
 
 Mr. 
 
 much 
 muchrwlll 
 
 much- will-have 
 must-be 
 must -come 
 
 must-do 
 
 must-expect 
 
 must-give 
 
 must-have 
 
 must-like 
 
 must-make 
 
 myself 
 
 mystery 
 
 natural 
 
 negligent 
 
 neighborhood 
 
 never 
 
 never-the-less 
 New-Hampshire 
 
 New- York 
 
 New- York-City 
 
 next 
 
 next-time 
 
 no-other 
 
 nor 
 
 North- America 
 
 Northwest 
 
 Northwestern 
 
 nothing 
 
 notwithstanding 
 
 November 
 
 now 
 
 nowhere 
 number 
 object 
 
 objection 
 objective 
 objectively 
 
 occur 
 
 of 
 
 of-it 
 
 of-thelr 
 
 oh 
 
 Ohio 
 
 \. 
 
Q M S 
 
 on 
 
 on-either-hand 
 
 one-of-the-best 
 
 one-of-the-most 
 
 one-or-two 
 
 only 
 
 on-the-one-hand 
 
 on-the-other-hand 
 
 onward 
 
 oppression 
 
 or 
 
 organize 
 
 or-not 
 ought 
 ougfit-to-have 
 
 our- own 
 
 out-of 
 
 over-and-over-agaln 
 
 overwhelm 
 
 owe 
 
 owner 
 
 ownership 
 
 part 
 
 partake 
 
 peculiarity 
 
 people 
 
 people-of-God 
 
 perfect 
 
 perfection 
 
 perform 
 
 perhaps 
 pleasure 
 P. M. 
 
 political 
 popular 
 posterity 
 
 postmark 
 postoffice 
 postcript 
 
 practice 
 princiral 
 principle 
 
 probability 
 
 probable 
 
 probably 
 
 proficiency 
 
 proficient 
 
 profit 
 
 proper 
 
 property 
 
 prophet 
 
 prosperity 
 providence 
 providential 
 
 public 
 
 publish 
 
 published 
 
 punish 
 
 punished 
 
 punishment 
 
 pure 
 
 question 
 
 quick 
 
 quite 
 
 railway-car 
 
 rather 
 
 rather-than 
 
 recollect 
 
 reduction 
 
 reflective 
 
 reflectively 
 
 reform 
 
 religion 
 
 relinquish 
 
 remark 
 
 remarkable 
 
 remember 
 
 represent 
 
 representation 
 representative 
 represented 
 
 respect 
 
 respectability 
 
 respectable 
 
 respectful 
 
 respectfully 
 
 responsible 
 
 revelation 
 revolution 
 said-to-have 
 
 salvation 
 
 satisfaction 
 
 satisfactory 
 
 satisfied 
 
 satisfy 
 
 Savior 
 
 vv\ 
 
 
 
S T U 
 
 scrip, i' re 
 
 sure 
 
 secure 
 
 surprise 
 
 senior V 
 
 suspicion 
 
 ret-forth 
 
 set-o f f 
 several 
 
 L takes-us 
 tell 
 tell-it 
 
 shall i 
 
 tell-us 
 
 shorthand y 
 should . . s. 
 
 temperament 
 , temperance 
 
 fUfnf^vre 
 
 t. temperate 
 
 si srTii^ ^a n t 
 
 temptation 
 
 signification 
 
 territory 
 
 sicnlfv /^> 
 
 testament 
 
 sfmilar 
 
 testimony 
 
 similarity 
 
 thank 
 
 simple 
 simplv 
 
 P./ that 
 the 
 
 single 
 
 their 
 
 siv-or-seven 
 
 them 
 
 some-one 
 
 the-other 
 
 some-other 
 
 the-other-one 
 
 some-ntber-one 
 
 there 
 
 some'h'ing 
 
 therefore 
 
 some-time ?X 
 
 ^. t'here-would-not 
 
 somewhat 
 
 they-are 
 
 Pou'^-Amerlca 
 
 they-are-not 
 
 spenk 
 
 they-will 
 
 special p 
 
 thins: 
 
 sneech \ 
 spirit .\ 
 
 think 
 this-is 
 
 spoke p 
 
 this-system 
 
 snoken 
 square .X 
 
 this- will 
 three-or-four 
 
 stenographer 
 
 till-lt 
 
 << nog-raphlc 
 
 to 
 
 stenography 
 
 to-be 
 
 subject & 
 
 to-become 
 
 subi'ective ^T 
 such-a-one \ 
 
 together 
 told 
 
 such-are 
 
 to-night 
 
 sroh-are-not 
 
 too 
 
 such-are-to-have 
 
 toward 
 
 such-hflve-had 
 
 towards 
 
 sir-h-oup-ht-to-have 
 
 truth 
 
 such-ought-to-have-had 
 
 try-to-have 
 
 ^nch-were 
 
 twelve 
 
 ^uch-were-not 
 
 two 
 
 such-were-to-have 
 
 two-or-three 
 
 "i.ic-h-will 
 
 unconcerned 
 
 s n ch-wou Id-have 
 
 under 
 
 such-would-have-had 
 
 undergo 
 
 sufficient 
 s'.'ffieiently 
 suppress \-ri 
 
 understand 
 uniform 
 union 
 
 1 
 
unite 
 
 United-States 
 
 unity 
 
 universal 
 
 universe 
 
 university 
 
 unless 
 
 until 
 
 unt'il-it 
 
 upon-his 
 
 upon-lt 
 
 use-it 
 
 virtue 
 
 was 
 
 Washing-ton 
 
 we-are-not 
 
 welcome 
 
 well 
 
 we-may 
 we-must 
 were 
 
 were-not 
 Western 
 West-Virginia 
 
 we- will 
 
 what 
 
 whatever 
 
 when 
 where 
 which 
 
 wTiich-are 
 which-are-not 
 which -a re- to-have 
 
 whichever 
 
 which-had-not 
 
 which-have 
 
 which-have-had 
 
 WMch-not 
 
 which-oug-ht-not 
 
 which-ought- to-have 
 which-ougM- to-have-had 
 which-were-not 
 
 which- were- to-have 
 whieh-will 
 whitfh- will-have 
 
 which- will-not 
 wh'ich-wouid-have 
 which- would-have-had 
 
 which- would-not 
 
 while 
 
 white 
 
 who 
 
 who-ever 
 
 who-have J 
 
 whole 
 wholly 
 whom 
 
 whose 
 
 why 
 
 why-not 
 
 will 
 
 will-not 
 
 wisdom I 
 
 wash 
 with 
 withdraw 
 
 with-Tiim 
 
 within 
 
 with-me 
 
 with-my 
 without 
 \vith-regard-to 
 
 wifh-whom 
 
 witness 
 
 word 
 
 word-of-God 
 
 world 
 
 would 
 
 ye 
 
 year 
 
 yesterday 
 
 yet 
 you 
 young 
 
 your 
 
 yourself 
 yours-truly 
 
 youth 
 
 J 
 
 f... 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 FLfc i 
 
 SEP 1819511 
 JUL87WW 
 
 KECTD MID 
 
 SEP 2 8 1961 
 
 Form L9-25m-9,'47(A5618)444 
 
 UNIVERSITY of CALIFORNIA 
 
 AT 
 LOS ANGELES 
 
A 000 583 835 4 
 
 Z$6 
 
 M795 
 
 190U 
 
 :- 
 WYER